9285.9-27
                                        EPA 540/R-94-099
                                        PB95-963212
                                        October 1994
INTRODUCTORY PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
             TRAINING MANUAL
        Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
          U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                  Washington, DC

-------

-------
                                        9285.9-27
                                        EPA 540/R-94-099
                                        PB95-963212
                                        October 1994
INTRODUCTORY PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
             TRAINING MANUAL
       Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
         U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                 Washington, DC

-------
                                                                          9285.9-27
                                                                          EPA540-R-94-099
                                                                          PB95-963212
                                      FOREWORD
This manual  is for reference use of students enrolled in scheduled training courses of the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). While it will be useful to anyone who needs information
on the subjects covered, it will have its greatest value  as an adjunct to classroom presentations
involving discussions among the students and the instructional staff.

This manual  has been developed with a goal of providing the best available current information;
however, individual instructors may provide  additional material to cover special aspects  of their
presentations.

Because of the limited availability of the manual,  it should not be cited in bibliographies or other
publications.

References to products and manufacturers are for illustration only; they do not imply endorsement
by EPA.

Constructive  suggestions for improvement of the content and format of the manual are welcome.

-------
         INTRODUCTORY  PRELIMINARY  ASSESSMENT TRAINING
                                          2 Days

This course provides participants with an introduction to the Superfund site assessment process and the
fundamentals of the preliminary assessment phase of this process. The site assessment process is used
to screen hazardous waste sites for inclusion on the U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency's (EPA)
National Priorities List and to prioritize sites for further investigation and remediation.  Participants will
receive the background necessary to perform preliminary assessments and to develop preliminary site
scores. The course is designed for individuals with little experience in the initial evaluation of hazardous
waste sites.

The course  format is based on the EPA document entitled Guidance for Performing  Preliminary
Assessments Under CERCLA. The focus is on implementing EPA preliminary assessment guidance rather
than on emphasizing the mechanics of scoring sites using the Hazard Ranking System.

Topics to be discussed include an overview of the site assessment process; the fundamentals of the Hazard
Ranking System;  data collection strategies; site reconnaissance and documentation procedures;  site,
source, and waste characterization techniques; groundwater, surface water, air, and soil exposure pathway
analyses; and preliminary assessment scoring methodology.

After completing this course, participants will be able to:

     •    Describe how the outcome of the site assessment process affects the placement  of a hazardous
          waste site on the National Priorities List.

     •    Define key phrases related to preliminary assessments.

     •    Conduct a preliminary assessment data search and develop a site reconnaissance plan.

     •    Perform preliminary assessment site scoring.

Note: Calculators are highly recommended.

Continuing Education Units:  1.2
                                             111

-------
                                TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section

Section 1:



Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
Section 6:
Section 7:
Section 8:
Section 9:
Title                                                            Page

Introduction

       Lecture Notes	1-1

Conducting the Preliminary Assessment Investigation

       Lecture Notes	2-1
       Case Study	2-12

Site, Source, and Waste Characterization

       Lecture Notes	3-1
       Case Study	3-12

Ground Water Pathway

       Lecture Notes	4-1
       Case Study	v 4-23

Surface Water Pathway

       Lecture Notes	5-1
       Case Study	5-21

Soil Exposure Pathway

       Lecture Notes	6-1
       Case Study	6-12

Air Pathway

       Lecture Notes	7-1
       Case Study	7-13

Completing the Preliminary Assessment Investigation

       Lecture Notes	8-1

Appendixes

       Appendix A - Fact Sheets
       Appendix B - Acronym List and Glossary
       Appendix C - Integrated Assessments
       Appendix D - PA Data and Site Characteristics Form

-------
 Section 1:
Introduction

-------
                               • INTRODUCTION  •
                             What You Can Expect

           This course...

              • Introduces the site assessment process and how preliminary
                assessments (PAs) fit in
              • Provides practical advice on conducting PAs and completing PA
                scoresheets
              • Focuses on existing guidance and how to use it
              • Introduces the concept of "integrated assessments"

           This course does not..

              • Assume you have much background in Superfund site
                assessment or with the Hazard  Ranking System (MRS)
                                                                   OH*1
                              PA Guidance Goals

                    Assist PA investigators in:

                       • Conducting high-quality assessments
                       • Making correct site screening or further action
                        recommendations
                       • Achieving national consistency in performing PAs
         PA Guidance, section 1.1                                           OH • 2
Introduction                                                                   10/94
page 1-2

-------
                              • INTRODUCTION
                          PA Guidance Structure
                       Section 1 • Introduction
                       Section 2 • Conducting the PA Investigation

                       Section 3 • Site Evaluation and Scoring
Section 4 • Reporting Requirements I
Section 5 • Reviews
References
I
I
Glossary I
Appendixes
I
        PA Guidance, section 1.1                                          OH • 3
V	
                   Legislative and Regulatory Background
                Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and
                Liability Act of 1980 (CERCLA), section 105
                Hazard Ranking System (MRS), 47 CFR 31180, July 16,1982
                Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (SARA)
                Revised MRS, 55 FR 51532, December 14,1990
        PA Guidance, section 1.2                                          OH • 4
10/94                                                                  Introduction
                                                                        page 1-3

-------
                               •  INTRODUCTION •
                                SARA Mandate

              "...assess the relative degree of risk to human health and the
                environment posed by sites."
        PA Guidance, section 1.2                                            OH • 5
V
         Notes:
Introduction                                                                   10/94
page 1-4

-------
                               INTRODUCTION •
             Super-fund Tackles Hazardous Waste Emergencies
                    and the Nation's Most Serious Sites
        Site Discovery and Study: Finding the Most Serious Sites
        Long-Term Cleanup:  Fixing the Most Serious Sites
National
Priorities
List







Rl/FS
Recc
Dec!

trdof
Iston





Remedial
Design

Rem
Act

edlal
ton





0AM

Deletion

                                                                 OH* 6
10/94
Introduction
  page 1-5

-------
                                  INTRODUCTION •
                           "Integrated Assessments"
                Integrating removal and remedial site assessment
                investigation to achieve increased efficiency and shorter
                response times
                One of many programs associated with the implementation of
                the Superfund Accelerated Cleanup Model (SACM)
                              Site Assessment Goals
            Screen
                Determine the nation's priorities for remediation
            Evaluate
                                                                       OH«7
                Identify and address sites posing immediate threats
                Identify sites with lesser threats and refer to appropriate authorities
                Identify sites for NPL
            Document
               • Establish defensible documentation
         PA Guidance, section 1.3
OH* 8
Introduction
page 1-6
      10/94

-------
INTRODUCTION
CERCUS
Sites

PA
| Sites


SI/HRS
Sites
NPL
Sites
Site Assessment Screening Process
PA Guidance, section 1.3
A
OH* 9
J

^\
The Site Assessment Process:
Preliminary Assessment (PA)
• First step to determine whether site warrants further CERCLA
action
• Low-cost review of available information (120 hours)
• States conduct PAs under cooperative agreements
• EPA-led PAs performed by contractors
• Results in a decision to proceed with process or NFRAP

Discovery •» CERCUS •»
PA *

HRS
SI .» HRS
^ Score

PA Guidance, sections 1.3 and 1.4
*~-~

•» NPL

OH* 10
J
194 Introduction
page 1-7

-------
                               •  INTRODUCTION
                        The Site Assessment Process:
                              Site Inspection (SI)

              • Involves more detailed data collection
              • Generally involves chemical sampling for the first time
              • Intended to test hypotheses and assumptions made at PA
              • Results in a decision to recommend for HRS scoring or NFRAP


Discovery

*

CERCLIS

•»

PA

*
HRS
8'

*

HRS
Score

*

NPL

      PA Guidance, section 1.3
OH* 11
                        The Site Assessment Process:
                        Hazard Ranking System (HRS)

               Tool to consistently screen and identify sites eligible for NPL
               Uses information gathered at PA and SI
               Assigns a score indicating "relative risk" of a site
               Results in a decision to list site on NPL or NFRAP

PA

*
HRS
SI

*

HRS
Scorn

      PA Guidance, section 1.3
OH* 12
Introduction
page 1-8
       10/94

-------
                                 INTRODUCTION
                       The Site Assessment Challenge

                Evaluate many sites with limited resources
                Make sound decisions from limited information
                Protect public health without spending excess resources on sites
                that pose little threat
      PA Guidance, section 1.2                                             OH • 13
V
                     The Four Site Assessment Questions

              1.  Have hazardous substances been deposited at the site?
                 If so, what and how much?
              2.  Have hazardous substances migrated from the site?
              3.  Who and what are likely to be impacted?
              4.  Must an emergency action be taken?
                                                                    OH* 14
10/94                                                                   Introduction
                                                                         page 1-9

-------
                                  INTRODUCTION
                             Why These Questions?

                     These questions are the foundation of MRS

               Evaluate:

                 • Waste characteristics
                 • Likelihood of release
                 • Targets
                                                                       OH* 18
                             MRS Factor Categories
               Waste
            Characteristics
  Ukelihood
  of Release
    Targets
            What are the
           properties of the
             hazardous
           substances, and
          how much is likely
             to migrate?
  What is the
likelihood that a
  hazardous
substance has
been or will be
   released
    to the
 environment?
 Who or what is
threatened by the
   hazardous
  substances?
                                                                       OH* 16
Introduction
page 1-10
                                                                              10/94

-------
                             •  INTRODUCTION •
                   MRS Pathways and Factor Categories





we


LR


T

Waste
Characteristics
Likelihood of
Release
Targets
Ground
Water



teal
Surface
Water



n
%rT
Air



Soil
Exposure



        PA Guidance, section 1.5
                                                                OH* 17
        Notes:
10/94
Introduction
 page 1-11

-------
                              INTRODUCTION
                       MRS Pathways Mini Exercise
                                                               OH* 18
Introduction
page 1-12
10/94

-------
                                   INTRODUCTION
                                Purpose of the PA
               • Differentiate sites that warrant further action from those that pose
                 little or no threat
               • Support emergency response and remedial activities
               • Gather information for the site assessment process
         PA Guidance, section 1.4                                             OH • 19
V
                                 Scope of  the PA*

               • Review existing information about the site
               • Conduct a site reconnaissance
               • Collect information about the site, especially target information
               • Reevaluate all information
               • Develop a preliminary site score
               • Prepare PA summary report

               •as defined in section 420 of the NCP (40 CFR Part 300)
         PA Guidance, section 1.4
                                                                         OH* 20
10/94                                                                      Introduction
                                                                             page 1-13

-------
                                    INTRODUCTION  •
                          PA Activities:  The Big Picture
                                                   Data collection
                                                   Reporting
                                                   Reconnaissance
                                                   Scoring
Typical Ranoa
 60-80 hours
 20-30 hours
 10-20 hours
  5-15 hours
                                                   AVERAGE PA = 120 hours
         PA Guidance, section 1.4, figure 1-2 (modified)
       OH* 21
                                    PA Structure

                 Follows MRS structure
                 Divided into four exposure routes (pathways)
                 Pathways divided into three factor categories
                 - Waste characteristics
                 - Likelihood of release
                 - Targets
                      Student note: Turn to PA Guidance, Table 1-1,
                             PA Factors by Pathway, page 9
         PA Guidance, section 1.5
       OH* 22
fnff
page 1-14
               10/94

-------
                                 INTRODUCTION
                                  PA Strategy

                Focus on critical factors—ones that most impact PA score
                Maintain nationally consistent evaluation process
                MRS model provides all factors involved in decision-making
                process
      PA Guidance, sections 1.4 and 1.5
OH* 23
                          PA Critical Factor Example:
                            Ground Water Pathway
                                Likelihood of Release
                                                                     OH* 24
10/94
   Introduction
    page 1-15

-------
                                  INTRODUCTION
                                     Targets

            Who and what are likely to be impacted?

               • Targets are critical
                - "Uncapped" factors—weigh heavily
                - No target = no site
               • A comprehensive target survey is possible at PA stage
      PA Guidance, section 1.5
OH* 26
                                 PA Terminology

                Sources
                Suspected release vs. no suspected release
                Primary targets vs. secondary targets
Yes
1
Primary
Targets

*

Suspected
Release?
1

Secondary
Targets
- •
| No
Secondary I
Targets 1
         PA Guidance, section 1.6
OH* 26
Introduction
page 1-16
       10/94

-------
                                                                                                                            8
                                GROUND WATER PATHWAY SCORESHEET
Pathway Ch*r*c1»ri*ticM
Do you suspect a release (see Ground Water Pathway Criteria List, page 7)7
Is the site located in karst terrain?
Depth to aquifer:
Distance to the nearest drinking water well:
Yes 	
Yes 	

No
No

It
(t
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
1. SUSPECTED RELEASE: II you suspect a release to ground water (see page 7),
   assign a score of 550.  Use only column A for this pathway.

2. NO SUSPECTED RELEASE: If you do not suspect a release to ground water, and
   the site is in karst terrain or the depth to aquifer is 70 feet or less, assign a score
   of 500; otherwise, assign a score of 340. Use only column B for this pathway.
TARGETS
3.  PRIMARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number of people served by
   drinking water wells that you suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
   substance from the site (see Ground Water Pathway Criteria List, page 7).
                                                       	people

4.  SECONDARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number of people served by
   drinking water wells that you do NOT suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
   substance from the site, and assign the total population score from PA Table 2.
          Are any wells part of a blended system?   Yes	  No	
          If yes, attach a page to show apportionment calculations.

5.  NEAREST WELL:  If you have identified a primary target population for ground
   water, assign a score of 50; otherwise, assign the Nearest Well score from
   PA Table 2.  If no drinking water wells exist within 4 miles, assign a score of zero.

6.  WELLHEAD PROTECTION AREA (WHPA): If any source lies within or above a  WHPA,
   or if you have identified any primary target well within a WHPA, assign a score of 20;
   assign 5 if neither condition holds  but a WHPA is present within 4 miles; otherwise
   assign zero.

7.  RESOURCES
                      lto.ao.iM.o.1. • a
                                    H0.1M.I.1.1. -a
                                                                          T -
WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
8. A.  If you have identified any primary target for ground water, assign the waste
      characteristics score calculated on page 4, or a score of 32, whichever is
      GREATER; do not evaluate  part B of this factor.

   B. If you have NOT identified any primary target for ground water, assign the
      waste characteristics score calculated on page 4,
                                     M00J3. • in
                                                                       we -
GROUND WATER PATHWAY SCORE:
LR  x  T  x WC
                                                             82,500
|tubf*ct to • maximum of
1001
                                                    A-15
                                                                                                     Introduction
                                                                                                       page  1-17

-------
                               •  INTRODUCTION •
                                PA Components

                       • Narrative report
                       • References
                       • PA data and site characteristics form
                       • PA scoresheets
              Turn to PA Guidance, appendixes A, C, and D for examples
        PA Guidance, appendixes A, C, and D                                 OH • 27
\	
         Notes:
Introduction                                                                   10/94
page 1-18

-------
        Section 2:
Conducting the Preliminary
 Assessment Investigation

-------
                        CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION  •
                            Preliminary Assessments
                                   PA Activities
         PA Guidance, section 1.4, figure 1-2 (modified)
                                                  Data collection
                                                  Reporting
                                                  Reconnaissance
                                                  Scoring
Typical Range
 60-80 hours
 20-30 hours
 10-20 hours
  5-15 hours
                                                  AVERAGE PA = 120 hours
       OH-1
Conducting tfi« PA Investigation
page 2-2
               4/94

-------
                     • CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION •
                           Data Collection: Strategies

                Verify site name and location
                Collect and review readily available general site information
                Determine site eligibility
                Conduct file searches
                Obtain and review "desktop" information
                Plan and conduct site reconnaissance
         PA Guidance, section 2                                               OH • 2
V
                     Data Collection:  PA Information Needs
                Specific information required to conduct a PA is contained in PA
                Guidance, Figure 2-1, Checklist of PA Information Needs, page 14
                Be familiar with this list before starting data collection activities
      PA Guidance, section 2                                                  OH • 3
4/94                                                        Conducting the PA Investigation
                                                                             page 2-3

-------
                                                   Figure 2-1
                                       Checklist of PA Information Needs
                                           GENERAL SITE INFORMATION
             Site Name and Location                            D Owner/Operator Information
             CERCLIS ID Number                               D Operational History
             Type of Facility                                   D Environmental Setting
             Type of Ownership                                D Approximate  Size of Site
             Site Status (active/inactive)                         D Latitude/Longitude
             Years of Operation                                D Site Sketch
                                     SOURCE AND WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
             Source Types and Locations                       ' D Waste Types and Quantities
             Size of Sources (dimensions)                        D Hazardous Substances Present
                                   GROUND WATER USE AND CHARACTERISTICS
           d! General Stratigraphy and Hydrogeology              D Municipal Wells Within 4 Miles
           D Presence of Karst Terrain                              (locations, populations served,
           D Depth to Shallowest Aquifer                           blended systems)
           D Private Wells Within 4 Miles                        D Distance to Nearest Drinking
              (locations, populations served)                          Water Well
                                                              D Wellhead Protection Areas
                                   SURFACE WATER USE AND CHARACTERISTICS
           D Flood Frequency at Site
           D Distance to Nearest Surface Water
           D Surface Water Body Types Within 15 Downstream Miles
           D Surface Water Flow Characteristics Within 15 Downstream Miles
           D Drinking Water Intakes Within  16 Downstream Miles (locations, populations served, blended systems)
           D Fisheries Within 15 Downstream Miles
           O Sensitive Environments and Wetlands Within 15 Downstream Miles
                                        SOIL EXPOSURE CHARACTERISTICS
           D Number of People Living Within 200 Feet            D Number of Workers at Facility
           D Schools or Day Care Within 200 Feet (enrollment)     D Locations of Terrestrial Sensitive Environments
           O Populations Within 1 Mile
                                         AIR PA THWA Y CHARACTERISTICS
           D Populations Within 4 Miles                         D Locations of Sensitive Environments
           D Distance to Nearest Individual                           Within 4 Miles
                                                              D Acreage of Wetlands Within 4 Miles
Conducting the PA Investigation
page 2-4

-------
                     •  CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION  •
                  Data Collection: PA Information Sources

               Site Assessment Information Directory (EPA)
               PA Guidelines, Appendix B, PA Information Sources
                           Go to PA Guidance, appendix B
         PA Guidance, section 2
             OH* 4
                        Data Collection: File Searches

            Existing file information

              • EPA RCRA files
              • EPA CERCLA files, 103 forms, citizen complaints
              • State environmental department files
              • State/county health department files
              • In-house files

            Tax offices

              • Historical property/ownership information
         PA Guidance, section 2.3
             OH* 5
4/94
Conducting the PA Investigation
                 page 2-5

-------
                    •  CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION  •
                  Data Collection:  "Desktop" Information

                      • Maps
                      • Geological information
                      • Data bases/geographic information systems
                      • Aerial photography
                      • Telephone inquiries
        PA Guidance, section 2.4
OH-6
                  Site Reconnaissance and Documentation
        PA Guidance, section 2.5
OH«7
Conducting the PA Investigation
page 2-6
       4/94

-------
                       CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION  •
                       Site Reconnaissance: Objectives

               • Observe site conditions
               • Verify
                - Site file data
                - Population data
                - Environmental data
               • Fill in data gaps identified after conducting file search
               • Develop documentation for reports, scores, and PA
                conclusions
               • Evaluate need for removal action
         PA Guidance, section 2.5                                             OH»8
                      Site Reconnaissance:  Preparation
                   • Review what is known about the site
                   • Plan to collect data to help determine:
                     - Source location, size, and  condition
                     - Likelihood of a release
                      • waste types and containment
                      • site security
                     - Targets most likely to be exposed
                      • distance from source to targets
                      • targets at greatest risk
                   • Decide whether to conduct onsite or offsite reconnaissance
                   • Prepare health and safety plan
                   • Gather necessary equipment

         PA Guidance, section 2.5.1                                            OH • 9
4/94                                                        Conducting ths PA Investigation
                                                                             page 2-7

-------
                       CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION
                        Site Reconnaissance: Activities

                  • Conduct perimeter survey
                  • Identify emergency response conditions
                  • Evaluate source types, sizes, and containment
                  • Assess waste disposal practices
                  • Estimate quantity
                  • Assess areas of stained soil and impacted vegetation
         PA Guidance, sections2.5.2and2.5.3                                  OH* 10
        	J
                       Site Reconnaissance:  Activities

                          • Determine drainage pathways
                          • Verify nearby targets
                          • Assess nearby land uses
                          • Interview local authorities
         PA Guidance, sections 2.5.2 and 2.5.3                                  OH • 11
Conducting the PA Investigation                                                      4/94
page 2-8

-------
                     CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION  •
                    Emergency Reponse Considerations
                   (Integrated Assessment and Response)

               Site conditions that might lead to a removal assessment:

                • Threat of fire and/or explosion
                • Threat of direct contact with hazardous substances
                • Threat of continuing release of hazardous substances
                • Threat of drinking water contamination
                Notify EPA when above conditions are observed

        PA Guidance, section 2.6                                         OH • 12



                               Documentation


                                         •  Photodocumentation
                                         •  Site sketch
                                            Logbook
                                                                  OH* 13
4/04                                                   Conducting th9 PA Investigation
                                                                      page 2-0

-------
                      CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION
                  Documentation: Logbook Entry Examples

                             • Personnel present
                             • Site location
                             • Date and time of visit
                             • Weather conditions
                             • Visual observations
                             • Photographic record
                             • Site sketch
                             • Conversations
                             • Housecounts
                        See example, PA Guidance, page 30
        PA Guidance, section 2.5.1                                        OH • 14
V
                   Documentation: Logbook Requirements

                        • Bound notebook
                        • Waterproof paper
                        • Waterproof ink
                        • Pages numbered
                        • Each page signed and dated
                        • Unused space crossed out
                  Student Note: Turn to Logbook Mini-Exercise
         PA Guidance, section 2.5.1                                        OH • 15
Conducting too PA Investigation                                                    4/94
page 2-10

-------
                       CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION
                          Example Logbook Entries—
                                 Good or bad?

        1.  0800. Arrived at the site and began the perimeter survey. The
           following potential sources were identified: drums, a debris pile, and
           some contaminated soil. The site was over 10 acres in size.  The
           nearest house was between 150 and 250 feet away.


        2.  0800. The following were observed in the southwest section of the
           property:
              • A lagoon filled to within 6 inches from top of freeboard. The
                area is estimated to be approximately 100 feet x 200 feet.
                Depth is unkown.
              • A vertical aboveground storage tank, 1000-gallon size.
                Written on  tank side:  "PENTA." Tank appears to be in good
                condition; no indication of leakage.

        3.1125. Followed site drainage from southeast comer of site to stream.
           Drainage path was dry and had some orange discoloration. There
           appeared to be some stressed vegetation along drainage (photo 13).
           Stream was flowing.

        4.  1420. Team members Hart and Jones met with Mr. Ralph Singer, chief
           engineer, City of Springfield Water Department.  He showed us a map
           indicating the location of the water intake on Lake Springfield and the
           distribution area served. He also provided the following information:
           1,476 households are served by this intake, no other sources of water
           exist within 15 miles downstream of the site, and the water from Lake
           Springfield is not blended with other supplies.

        5.  0745. Arrived on site and met with site owner, Ms. Frieda Gluck.  We
           toured the site and observed several drums and a  debris pile. She
           said that her husband, who had operated the site, was dead and that
           she didn't have any money if EPA wanted to prosecute her.
4/94                                                       Conducting the PA Investigation
                                                                           page 2-11

-------
                     • CONDUCTING THE PA INVESTIGATION •


                       CASE STUDY: ABC VACUUM SERVICE

                             GENERAL INFORMATION

OBJECTIVE

Using background information, inspection reports, and site reconnaissance notes for the ABC
Vacuum Site, complete the "General Information" portion of the PA scoresheet.

METHOD

      1. Review the background information, site reconnaissance logbook notes and map,
         and the waste management inspection report.
      2. Read the PA scoresheet general information instructions provided in this case study.
      3. Complete the "Site Description and Operational History" and "Probable Substances
         of Concern* portions of the PA scoresheet.
General Overview:

      • This 13-acre site is located in Atlas Parish, Louisiana. It is currently inactive.

      • The site was operated as a vacuum service and drilling fluids manufacturer from 1975
       to 1985 (prior history is unknown).

       - Wastewater was extracted from reserve pits created during petroleum exploration
         and production activities.
       - The facility is believed to have transported hazardous wastes that may have been
         discharged into an onsite lagoon.
       - The facility manufactured water- and oil-based drilling fluids.

      • The perimeter of the site is unfenced. Trespassing occurs infrequently.

      • Five homes in a small subdivision are situated between 100 and 200 feet to the
       northwest of the site.

      • The mean annual precipitation is 57 inches.
Conducting ffio PA Investigation                                                       4/94
page 2-12

-------
            WASTE MANAGEMENT INSPECTION REPORT
DATE
                   10
 FACILITT_


 LOCATION
FXCILITT TYPE   Vacuum.
                                 .Q^«4  drllUcfc, £U/fti:S
       or
                                   ^pWrgAf ^"V^A      ^
RCSA WASTE COOES
                                           Conducting the PA Investigation
                                                         page 2-13

-------
           WASTE MANAGEMENT INSPECTION REPORT - PAGE 2
WXflTZ QUMTTITIES
                           A&>W/r> hng
                                            cr
    NOHCOMPLIAHCZ
    COMMZMT8
            .•            x*l                     i/
      T8  A\UyW<   M>   W. /i«M^4g^  -Wa^OfrrWi  4p  ^?«U g^d


      "^g^Y^/^". L-QjC^*rs-f\  ^JMvVrSr./j^LO^^W^A. / > AA PV^/*^T\ hp g/*\  i)aft)rr\<»_
        \..-
-------
   I
  
-------
o>
  2
  31

 I
.  Volume LMKncavi.     	
                                                                  JW.W
                                                                  	    Sifc

                                                                    	    am

-------
ID ta
fl^ Q»

(D«Q
                                                                                                                 7«- of s/Ve	

                                                                                                              aieffcJ.	    	.

-------
;± S. Houses
                                 ABC   icuuM SERVICE
                                      no-* -to sc°'e
TRACK

-------
                           APPENDIX A
                                    OMB Approval  Number:  2050-0095
                                    Approved for  Use Through:  1/92
                PA  Scoresheets
Site Name:
CERCLIS ID No.:

Street Address: _

City/State/Zip:
Investigator:
Agency/Organization:

Street Address:	

City/State/Zip: 	

Date:
                                             Conducting the PA Investigation
                                                          page 2-19
                               A-1

-------
                                INSTRUCTIONS FOR SCORESHEETS
   Introduction

   This scoresheets package functions as a  self-contained workbook providing all of the basic tools to
   apply collected data and calculate a PA score.  Note that a computerized scoring tool, "PA-Score," is
   also available from EPA (Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, Directive 9345.1-11). The
   scoresheets provide space to:

       •  Record information collected during the PA
       •  Indicate references to support information
       •  Select and assign values  ("scores") for factors
       •  Calculate pathway scores
       •  Calculate the site score

   Do not enter values or scores in shaded areas  of the scoresheets.  You are encouraged to write notes
   on the scoresheets  and especially on  the Criteria Lists.  On scoresheets with a reference column,
   indicate a number corresponding to attached sources  of information or pages containing rationale for
   hypotheses; attach to the scoresheets a numbered list of these references. Evaluate all four pathways.
   Complete all Criteria Lists, scoresheets,  and tables.  Show calculations, as appropriate.  If scoresheets
   are photocopy reproduced, copy and submit the numbered pages (right-side pages) only.
                                      GENERAL INFORMATION
   Site Description and Operational History:  Briefly describe the site and its operating history.  Provide
   the site name, owner/operator,  type of facility and operations, size  of property,  active or inactive
   status, and years of waste generation.  Summarize waste treatment, storage, or disposal activities that
   have or may have occurred at the site;  note also if these activities are documented or alleged.  Identify
   probable  source types and prior spills.  Summarize highlights of previous investigations.
   Probable Substances of Concern:  List hazardous substances  that have or may have been stored,
   handled, or disposed at the site, based on your knowledge of site operations. Identify the sources to
   which the substances may be related. Summarize any existing analytical data concerning hazardous
   substances detected onsite, in releases from the site, or at targets.
Conducting the PA Investigation
page 2-20                                       A.2

-------
                                 GENERAL INFORMATION
Site Description and Operational History:
Probable Substances of Concern:
(Previous investigations, analytical data)
                                                                Conducting the PA Investigation
                                                                                    page 2-21
                                           A-.1

-------
                             GENERAL INFORMATION (continued)
Site Sketch-  Prepare-a sketch of the site (freehand is acceptable).  Indicate all pertinent features of
the site and nearby environs, including:  waste sources, buildings, residences, access roads, parking
areas drainage patterns/water bodies, vegetation, wells,  sensitive env.ronments, etc.
 Conducting the PA /nvest/gatfon
 page 2-22                                     A-4

-------
                           GENERAL INFORMATION (continued)
Site Sketch:
(Show all pertinent features, indicate sources and closest targets, indicate north)
                                           A-5
                                                               Conducting the PA Investigation
                                                                                  page 2-23

-------
             CASE STUDY SUPPLEMENT: ABC VACUUM SERVICE

                          GENERAL INFORMATION

OBJECTIVE

Using available general site information for the ABC Vacuum Service site, identify data
gaps, develop a set of PA site reconnaissance objectives, address site access issues,
complete an equipment list, and determine the adequacy of a prepared site safety
plan.

METHOD

      1.     Review the site information found in the student manual. Working with
            an assigned partner or group,  complete the  following activities and
            record all answers on the worksheet provided with this exercise.

            •      Identify any obvious data gaps in the available information.

            »      List at least eight (8) PA site reconnaissance objectives for the
                  ABC Vacuum site.

            •      Outline the steps necessary to obtain access to this site.

      2.     Read the site safety plan prepared for the ABC Vacuum site. Determine
            if this plan is adequate for the PA objectives outlined above. Make any
            necessary adjustments to the plan.

      3.     Complete the attached equipment list for the site reconnaissance of the
            ABC Vacuum site. Include only the equipment you will need to meet the
            PA objectives.
Conducting the PA Investigation
page2a-1                                                               11/94

-------
             CASE STUDY SUPPLEMENT: ABC VACUUM SERVICE

                               WORKSHEET
Identify data gaps:
List at least eight PA site reconnaissance objectives:

1	

2	

3	

4	

5	

6	

7	

8	
Outline the steps necessary to obtain site access:
Conducting the PA Investigation
page2a-2                                                            11/94

-------
                                     SITE SAFETY PLAN
Site Name:
Site Address:
              Site Contact:
              Phone f:
              Other Contacts:
Purpose of site visit:
Proposed investigation team:

Responsibility

Site Manager:
Site Surveillance Team Member:
Site Surveillance Team Member:
              Personnel
Site status:    active:  	  inactive: 	unknown:

Hazard evaluation: (check all that apply)

waste types:  liquid:  	   solid: 	   sludge: _
waste characteristics:
              corrosive:
              toxic:	
ignitable:
reactive: .
Identification of expected hazards (chemical/physical):
Hazard assessment:   low.
moderate
Work tasks to be performed:
                     vapor:
volatile: _
unknown:
       reactive:
       other: _
high
unknown
Protective equipment/clothing:
                  Respiratory     Clothing       Gloves         Boots        Modifications
                   (A,B,C,D)      
-------
                     EQUIPMENT UST: SITE RECONNAISSANCE VISIT

                            (Check off those items that apply)
Expendable Protective Equipment




butyl rubber boots (M_, L_, XL_)
boot covers (S_, M_, L_, XL_)
hip boots (specify size)
other
Respiratory Protection








SCBA tanks (45 cu. ft. composite)
SCBA harness
Cascade system
50-foot airlines
full-face respirator (SCBA/APR)
respirator cartridges (specify type)
escape bottle
other
Gloves







cotton (work
gloves)
Viton
Butyl
Neoprene
Latex
leather
other
Recordkeeping Supplies




field notebook
waterproof pens/indelible markers
clipboard
ruler
Chemical Resistant Clothing




Tyvek (S_. M_, L
Saranex (S 	 , M 	 ,
fully encapsulating
_, XL_, XXL_)
L_, XL, XXL_)
suit (specify size)
other
Personal Protection/Safety Equipment
hard hat
safety goggles
splash shield
rain suit (S 	 , M 	 , L 	 ,
life vest (S_, M_, L_,
XL_, XXL_)
XL_, XXL_)
ear plugs
first aid kit
other
, Air Monitoring Equipment







PID (HNU 	 , Photovac 	 , other 	 )
organic vapor analyzer
oxygen meter/explosimeter
hydrogen sulfide meter
radiation meter/mini-rad
detector tubes
other (specify )
Meters




pH meter
conductivity meter
resistivity meter
metal detector
Conducting the PA Investigation
equip.list page 1
10/94

-------
                      EQUIPMENT UST: SITE RECONNAISSANCE VISIT

                            (Check off those items that apply)
Cameras/Film






SX70 Polaroid
35mm Pentax
Kodamatic
12/24/36 print film (rolls )
1 2/24/36 slide film (rolls )
other
Surveying Equipment






optical rangefinder
Brunton compass
compass
binoculars
300-foot steel tape
wooden stakes
Decontamination








Indian Tank
hand sprayer
eyewash bottles
scrub brushes
Alconox
buckets
paper towels
other
Hand Tools








hacksaw
bolt cutter
wire cutter
pliers
rake
shovel
trowel
other
Tape






clear plastic
duct tape
masking tape
strapping tape/fiber tape
flagging tape
other
Miscellaneous






mobile phone
radios
locks/keys
trash bags
plastic roll (10 feet by 25 feet)
vermiculite
Additional supplies:
Conducting the PA Investigation
equip.list page 2
10/94

-------
      Section 3:
Site, Source, and Waste
   Characterization

-------
                •  SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •
                          Site Assessment Question 1


                Have hazardous substances been deposited at the site?
                If so, what and how much?

                Evaluate waste characteristics once—use for all four pathways
         PA Guidance, section 3.2                                            OH • 1
                      How to Structure Your Data Search

            Types of sources on file
              • Any impoundments? Are they full? Have they overflowed? Can
                they? If empty, were they used at one time? Where did the
                contents go?
              • Any drums? Are they corroding? How are they stored and
                protected from weather? Can contents get out?

            Waste quantity
              • How much?
              • What kinds?
              • Physical nature (solid or liquid)?
         PA Guidance, section 3.2                                            OH • 2
S/to, Source, and Waste Characterization                                               4/94
page 3-2

-------
                • SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •
                      Source/Waste Information Sources

                      Files
                         • Waste manifests
                         • Prior inspection reports
                         • Prior enforcement orders

                      Site reconnaissance observations
                         • Source size/dimensions
                         • Containment
                         • Evidence for waste migration

                      Aerial photography
                         • Current and historical source types and locations
                         • Source size/dimensions
      PA Guidance, section 3.2                                                   OH • 3
V	
                                  Site Definition

               • A site is an area consisting of the aggregation of sources and the
                areas between sources
               • A site is independent of property boundaries
               • A site should be defined using all information, historical and
                present day, regardless of current fences, boundaries, or
                ownership
      PA Guidance, section 3.2.1                                                 OH • 4
4/94                                                 Stto, Source, and Waste Characterization
                                                                            page 3-3

-------
               • SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •
                       Mini Exercise: Defining the Site
                                                       New
                                                    Residential
                                                    Community
             XYZ
          Corporation
Current XYZ
property boundary
                                                                    OH* 5
Srtg, Source, and Waste Characterization
page 3-4
                                         4/94

-------
                • SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION
                                Source Definition

           Definition

              • Source:  area where hazardous substances have been deposited,
                stored, disposed of, or placed. Also, soil that may be
                contaminated from hazardous substance migration.

           Reminders

              • Evaluate present and former sources.
              • Generally, source information is limited. However,  incomplete
                information is still useful.
         PA Guidance, section 3.2.1                                           OH • 6
V
                                Types of Sources

                             • Landfills
                             • Surface impoundments
                             • Drums
                             • Containers or tanks
                             • Waste piles
                             • Landfarm/land treatment
                             • Contaminated soil
                             • Other
         PA Guidance, section 3.2.1, table 3-1                                    OH • 7
4/94                                                Site, Source, and Waste Characterization
                                                                            page 3-5

-------
                   SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION
                      MRS SOURCE TYPE DESCRIPTIONS

  Active fire area: An area that is presently burning or smoldering and which, without
  remedial action, will continue to do so intensely.

  Buried/below-ground containers or tanks:  A container or tank, the entire surface area
  of which is situated completely below the surface and which is not visible; however, a
  buried/below-ground tank may have a small fraction of its associated piping above the
  surface.

  Buried/backfilled surface impoundment: A surface impoundment that has been com-
  pletely covered with soil after final deposition  of waste materials.

  Bum pit: An uncovered area on or under the land surface that was at one time used to
  bum waste materials or was otherwise significantly inflamed but is not presently burning.

  Containers or tanks:  (1) Any stationary device designed to contain an accumulation of
  waste, which is constructed primarily of nonearthen materials (e.g., wood, concrete, steel,
  or plastic) which provides structural support.  (2) Any portable device in which waste is
  stored or otherwise handled.

  Contaminated soil (excluding land treatment):  (1) An area of soil that contains con-
  centrations of a hazardous substance significantly above background.  Evidence that the
  substance detected is related to the site must be provided to substantiate use of this
  descriptor. (2) An area on which available evidence demonstrates that hazardous sub-
  stances were spilled.  Note:  somewhat similar to area of observed contamination but
  without the requirement that the hazardous substance be located within 2 feet of the
  surface.

  Landfarm/land treatment: A method of waste management in which liquid waste or
  sludges are spread over land and tilled.  Also applies to the shallow injection of liquids.
  The distinguishing characteristic is shallow injection or tilling of the soil.

  Landfill: (1) A cleared area on the ground surface containing waste.  (2) A man-made or
  natural hole in the ground containing waste. The landfill may have been backfilled with
  soil, either after or contemporary with the waste disposal, covering the wastes from view.
  The landfill may have been formed either by excavating  the hole or by forming earthen
  walls around a cleared area.  Due to weathering,  erosion, and similar phenomena, how-
  ever, once-buried wastes in a landfill may become exposed (e.g., partially buried drums).
  The contents of a landfill may include nearly any or all types of wastes, including buried
  drums.
S/fc, Source, and Wastg Characterization                                                 4/94
page 3-6

-------
                •  SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •
  Piles (by type):

  Chemical waste pile: A pile consisting primarily of discarded chemical products
  (whether marketable or not), by-products, or unused feedstocks.

  Scrap metal or junk pile: A pile consisting primarily of scrap metal or discarded du-
  rable goods (e.g., appliances, automobiles, auto parts, furniture).

  Tailings pile: A pile consisting of primarily of any combination of overburden from a
  mining operation and tailings from a mineral mining, beneficiation, or processing opera-
  tion.

  Trash pile: A pile consisting of primarily paper, garbage, refuse, or discarded non-
  durable  goods (e.g., food packaging).

  Other A term reserved for use when a pile of indeterminate origin  has accumulated and
  is shown to contain certain hazardous substances, contaminants, pollutants, or radionu-
  clides.

  Surface Impoundment: A natural topographic depression, man-made excavation,
  bermed, or diked area, primarily formed from earthen materials (lined or unlined) which
  was designed to hold an accumulation of liquid wastes, wastes containing free liquids, or
  sludges that were not backfilled or otherwise covered. The distinguishing characteristics
  of a surface impoundment are the emphasis on liquid waste and the general lack of soil
  cover. Two types of surface impoundments are distinguished: those at which the depos-
  ited liquid has evaporated, volatilized, or leached (dry), and those with exposed liquid
  (other).  Synonymous terms include lagoon pond, aeration pit, settling pond, and tailings
  pond.
4/94                                                  SH9, Source, and Waste C/wvcteffzattofi
                                                                              page 3-7

-------
                • SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •
                            Waste Characterization

           Evaluate each source at a site based on four tiers

              • Constituent quantity
              • Wastestream quantity
              • Source volume
              • Source area

           For each source, evaluate as many tiers as you have information to
           support.
                           Go to PA Guidance, appendix A,
                                PA table 1, page A-9
         PA Guidance, section 3.2.2 (definitions on page 45)                         OH • 8
V	J
                      Waste Characterization (continued)

                For constituent and wastestream tiers, all quantities are converted
                to pounds so they can be added together
                Use conversions on table 1 (page A-9)
                Constituent and wastestream information is often unavailable at
                PA stage
         PA Guidance, section 3.2.2                                           OH • 9
Site, Source, and Waste Characterization                                                4/94
page 3-8

-------
                  SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION
                   Waste Characterization (continued)

         Single source site

           • Three waste characterization (WC) values based on ranges of
             waste quantity:
             - 18
             -32
             - 100
           • Use Single Source column of table 1a; assign each evaluated tier
             a WC score based on its waste quantity
           • Highest WC value is WC score for site


      PA Guidance, section 3.2.2, page 47                                   OH • 10
      Notes:
4/94                                               Sits, Sourc9, and Waste Characterization
                                                                          page 3-9

-------
               • SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •
                               Mini Exercise:
                Waste Characteristics Score:  Single Source
        Example:   500 gallons of a spent solvent mixture
                   disposed of in a landfill that is 600 feet
                   wide, 1,000 feet long, and 30 feet deep.

        Directions: Using PA table 1 (page A-9 of PA
                   Guidance), determine  the waste
                   characteristic (WC) score for all tiers.
        AREA = 600 ft x 1,000 ft = 600,000 square feet
        VOLUME = 600 ft x 1,000 ft x 30 ft = 18,000,000 cubic feet
        WASTESTREAM QUANTITY = 500 gal x 10 Ibs/gal = 5,000 Ibs of
                                                    wastestream
        CONSTITUENT QUANTITY = Unknown
                                                                  OH* 11
Site, Source, and Waste Characterization
page 3-10
4/94

-------
                • SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •
                   Waste Characterization (continued)

         Multiple source site

            • Determine waste quantity for each applicable tier of each source
             using divisors in Multiple Source column of table 1a
            • Select highest waste quantity for each source
            • Sum source highest waste quantity values to yield waste quantity
             total
            • Apply waste total to table 1 b to determine WC score for site
      PA Guidance, section 3.2.2, page 47                                      OH • 12
V
      Notes:
4/94                                                Site, Source, and Waste Characterization
                                                                           page 3-11

-------
                • SITE, SOURCE, AND WASTE CHARACTERIZATION •


                       CASE STUDY: ABC VACUUM SERVICE

                          SOURCE CHARACTERIZATION


OBJECTIVE

Using the site information from the site reconnaissance visit, general information from the
previous exercise, and the site map, determine the waste characteristic score for each source.

METHOD

      1.  Review the source information provided below.


      2.  Describe each source on the source evaluation worksheet.

      3.  Use PA Table 1, "Waste Characteristics (WC) Scores," and the source descriptions
         to calculate the WC scores for each source.  Record the calculations and the scores
         on the source evaluation scoresheets.


Potential Sources:

      • Two hundred drums are situated on a small concrete pad north of the aboveground
       mixing tanks.

      • A lagoon on the northwest comer of the site is bounded on the south and west by
       drainage ditches. The estimated area of the lagoon is 3,000 square feet.

      • There is a 750-square-foot oxidation  pond behind the warehouse.  Unspecified debris
       was observed in the pond during the  site reconnaissance.

      • A 500-square-foot rubbish pile is located on the southeastern comer of the site.


      • Two 1,000-gallon mixing tanks are located on a concrete pad on the  northeastern
       comer of the site.

      • Some parts of the drainage ditches were seen overflowing during reconnaissance.
       Three distinct areas of stained soil were observed; total estimated area, 1,000 square
       feet.

S/te, Source, and Mfesto Characterization                                               4/94
page 3-12

-------
   ABC Vacuum Service
                    Drainage ditches
                    Drainage direction
                                          Warehouse complex road
                                            Not to Scale
o> 3

-------
                                           SOURCE EVALUATION


  •   Number  and name each source (e.g.,  1. East Drum Storage Area, 2. Sludge Lagoon, 3. Battery Pile).

  •   Identify  source type according to the  list below.

  •   Describe the physical  character  o( each source  (e.g.,  dimensions, .contents,  waste types,  containment,
     operating history).

  •   Show waste quantity (WQ) calculations (or each source for appropriate tiers. Refer to instructions opposite
     page 5 and  PA Tables 1 a and 1 b.  Identify waste quantity tier and waste characteristics (WC) factor category
     score (for a  site with a single source, according to PA Table  1 a).  Determine WC from PA Table 1 b for the sum
     of source WQs for a multiple-source site.

  •   Attach additional  sheets if necessary.

  •   Determine the site WC factor category score and  record at the bottom of the page.
                                           Source Type Descriptions

   Landfill:  an engineered (by excavation or construction) or natural hole in ihe ground into which wastes have been
   disposed by backfilling, or by contemporaneous soil deposition with waste disposal, covering wastes from view.

   Surface Impoundment:  e topographic depression, excavation, or diked area, primarily formed from earthen
   materials (lined or unlined) and designed to hold accumulated liquid wastes, wastes containing free liquids, or
   sludges that were not backfilled or otherwise  covered during periods of deposition; depression may be dry if
   deposited liquid has evaporated, volatilized or leached, or wet with exposed liquid;  structures that may be more
   specifically described as lagoon pond, aeration pit, settling pond, tailings pond, sludge pit, etc.; also e surface
   impoundment that has been covered with  soil after the final deposition of waste materials (i.e., buried or
   backfilled).

   Drums:  portable containers designed to hold a standard 55-gallon volume  of wastes.

   Tanks and  Non-Drum Containers; any stationary device, designed to contain accumulated wastes, constructed
   primarily of fabricated materials (such as wood, concrete, steel, or plastic) that provide structural support; any
   portable or mobile device in which waste is stored or otherwise handled.

   Contaminated  Soil:  soil onto which available evidence indicates that a hazardous substance was spilled, spread,
   disposed, or deposited.

   Plla:  any non-containerized  accumulation  above the ground surface of solid, non-flowing wastes; includes open
   dumps.  Some types of piles are: Chemical Waste Pile -• consists primarily  of discarded chemical products, by-
   products,  radioactive wastes, or used or unused feedstocks; Scrap Metal or Junk Pile •- consists primarily of
   scrap metal or discarded durable goods such as appliances, automobiles, auto parts, or batteries, composed of
   materials suspected to contain or have contained  a hazardous substance; Tailings  Pile •- consists primarily of any
   combination of overburden from a mining  operation and tailings from a mineral mining, beneficiation, or  processing
   operation; Trash Pile -- consists primarily of paper, garbage, or discarded non-durable goods which are suspected
   to contain or have contained a hazardous  substance.

   Land Treatmant: landfarming or other land treatment method of waste management in which liquid wastes or
   sludges are spread over land and tilled, or liquids are  injected at shallow depths into soils.

   Other: a source that does not  fit any of the descriptions  above; examples include contaminated building,  ground
   water plume with no identifiable source, storm drain, dry well, and injection  well.
Site, Source, and Waste Characterization
page 3-14
                                                      A-O

-------
                                       SOURCE EVALUATION
Source
  No.:
                  Source Name:
Source Description:
                                  Source Waste Quantity (WQ) Calculations:
Source
  No.:
                  Source Name:
Source Description:
                                   Source Waste Quantity (WQ) Calculations:
Source
  No.:
Source Name:
Source Description:
Source Waste Quantity (WQ) Calculations:
                                                                                            Site WC:
                                                                  Site, Source, and Waste Characterization
                                                                                                 page 3-15
                                                 A-7

-------
                                 WASTE CHARACTERISTICS (WC) SCORES

    WC, based on waste quantity,  may be  determined  by one or all of  four  measures called  "tiers'-
    constituent quantity, wastestream quantity, source volume, and source area.  PA Table  1a (page 5)
    is divided into these  four tiers. The amount and detail of infprmation available determine which tier(s)
    to use for each source.  For each source, evaluate waste quantity by as many of the tiers as you have
    information to support, and select  the result  that  gives you the highest  WC  score.   If minimal,
    incomplete,  or no  information is available regarding  waste quantity,  assign a WC score  of 18
    (minimum).

    PA  Table 1a has 6 columns:  column  1  indicates the quantity tier; column 2 lists source types for the
    four tiers; columns 3, 4, and 5 provide ranges of waste amount for sites with only one source, which
    correspond to WC scores at the top of  the columns (18, 32, or  TOO); column 6 provides  formulas to
    obtain source waste quantity (WQ) values at sites with multiple sources.

    To determine WC for aftej with only one source:

      1.   Identify source  type (see descriptions  opposite page 41.

      2.   Examine all waste quantity date available.

      3.   Estimate the mass and/or dimensions  of the source.

      4.   Determine which quantity tiers to use based on available source information.

      5.   Convert source measurements to appropriate units for each tier you can evaluate for the source.

      6.   Identify the range into which the total quantity falls for each tier evaluated (PA Table Taj.

      7.   Determine the highest WC score obtained for any tier 118, 32. or TOO, at top of PA Table la columns 3, 4, and
           5, respectively).

      8.   Use this WC score for a/I pathways. '

    To determine WC for srtas with murtiple sources:

      1.   Identify each source type [see descriptions  opposite page 41.

      2.   Examine all waste quantity data available for each source.

    .  3.   Estimate the mass and/or dimensions of each source.

      4.   Determine which quantity tiers to use for each source based on the available information.

      5.   Convert source measurements to appropriate units for- each tier you can evaluate for each source.

      6.   For each source, use the formulas in column 6 of PA Table la to determine the WQ value for each tier that can
           be evaluated.  The highest WQ value  obtained for any tier is the WQ value for the source.

      7.   Sum the WQ values for ell sources to get the site WQ total.

      8.   Use the site WQ total from step  7 to  assign the WC score from PA Table 1b.

      9.   Use this WC score for ell pathways. '
     '    The WC score is considered in all four pathways.  However,  if a primary target is identified for the ground
         water, surface water, or air migration pathway, assign the determined WC or a score of 32, whichever is
         greater, as the WC score for that pathway.

Site, Source, and Waste Characterization
page 3-16                                            A_8

-------
                              PA TABLE 1:  WASTE CHARACTERISTICS (WC) SCORES
  V
  o
  I
  u
  M
  E
  A
  R
  E
  A
        SOURCE TYPE
             N/A
             N/A
Landfill

Surface
impoundment
Drums

Tanks and non-
drum containers

Contaminated soil


Pile


Other
Landfill

Surface
impoundment

Contaminated soil


Pile"


Land treatment
                            PA Tabl* 1i:  WC Scores for Single Source Situ and Formula!
                                             for Multiple Source Site*
SINGLE SOURCE SITES (aulgned WC icoru)
WC - 18
S 1 OO Ib
i 500, OOO Ib
S6.75 million fr1
S250.OOO yd'
S6.750 tr3
S2SO yd3
3 l.CXX) dnjmt
S 50, OOO otMoni
i6.75 million h*
S250.0OO yd'
S6.750 ft*
S250 yd'
S6.750 fr1
S250 yd'
S340.OOO fr1
27.8 gent
S1.3OO fr1
SO.O29 «ci«.
S3. 4 million fr1
£78 >crti
S1.30O fr1
50.029 «cr.«
S27.000 h*
£0.02 «eni
WC - 32
> 100 10 10.000 Ib
> 5OO.OOO to SO million Ib
> 4.75 million 10 675 million ft3
> 250.0OO 10 25 million yd1
>6,750 \o 675. OOO fr"
>250 lo 25.000 yd1
> l.OOO lo 100. OOO dnjm»
> 50.0OO 10 5 million oalloni
>«.75 million lo 875 million fr1
> 250. OOO 10 25 million yd'
>0.750 lo 675. OOO ft1
>250 to 25, OOO yd'
>6.7SO to 675. OOO fr"
>250 to 25.000vd'
>34O.OOO to 3* million rr1
> 7.8 to 780 i
>1,30O lo 130. OOO FT1
>0.029 lo 2.9 icrti
>3.4 million to 340 million hr1
>78 lo 7. BOO >crn
> 1.3OO lo 130.0OO tr>
70.029 10 2.9 >cr27.OOO lo 2.7 million fr1
>0.92 lo 62  10, OOO Ib
> SO million Ib
>675 million fr1
>25 million yd'
>675,000 fr3
> 25.000 yd'
> 100, OOO dnjm«
> 5 million g'Hont
>675 million (T1
> 25 million yd'
>675.OOO fr"
> 25.000 yd'
> 675. OOO ft3
> 25.000 yd'
> 34 million fr1
> 780 >ci«i
> I3O.OOO rr1
> 2.S icrgi
>34O million fr1
>7.8OO tcni
> 130. OOO fr"
> 2.9 »erti
> 2.7 mtlllon fr1
> 62 »crti
                                                                                             MULTIPLE SOURCE
                                                                                                   SITES
                                                                                                Formula lor
                                                                                              Anigning Source
                                                                                                WQ Valuei
                                                                                                  Ib
                                                                                                Ib -•- 5,000
                                                                                               tr3 H-  67,500
                                                                                               Y0 10 100
> 100 lo 10.0OO
> 10.0OO
WC Scan
18
32
100
                                                                       Site, Source, and Waste Characterization
                                                                                                        page 3-17
                                                       A-9

-------
                  Section 4:
          Ground Water Pathway
Resources
         Wellhead
         protection
           area
Nearest
 well
  \
Ground water
 population
                                             /\
                       AQUIFER

-------
                          • GROUND WATER PATHWAY  •
                             Ground Water Pathway
                        Wellhead
                        protection
                        area
                                       AQUIFER
                                                                       OH*1
                             Data Search Questions

                  Aqurferfs)
                     • What is local stratigraphy?
                     • What aquifer(s) serves nearby areas?
                     • How deep is the shallowest aquifer?

                  Wells (targets)
                     • How many drinking water wells? Locations?
                     • Any municipal systems? Private wells?
                     • How many people are served?
                     • Is water from different wells blended? Is ground
                       water blended with surface water?
                                  Go to PA Guidance,
                     appendix A, page A-11, Ground Water Use Description
         PA Guidance, section 3.3
OH* 2
Ground Water Pathway
page 4-2
        4/94

-------
                            GROUND WATER PATHWAY
                               Aquifer Definition

            Aquifer (as defined by PA Guidance)

               • Saturated subsurface zone from which drinking water is drawn
               • For site assessment purposes, ground water used for certain
                resources, such as agriculture and recreation, is also evaluated
         PA Guidance, section 3.3, page 52                                     OH • 3
v
                      Ground Water Information Sources

                             • U.S. Geological Survey (USGS)
                             • Well logs
                             • Water utility
                             • Local offices
                             • Site reconnaissance observations
                             • Files for other, nearby sites
                             • Data bases
         PA Guidance, section 3.3                                            OH • 4
4/94                                                             Ground Water Pathway
                                                                           page 4-3

-------
                          GROUND WATER PATHWAY
               Site Assessment Questions for Ground Water
         1.
Have hazardous
substances been
deposited at the
site? If so, what?
How much?
2.  What is the likelihood
   that hazardous
   substances have been
   released to ground
   water?
             WC  x   LR   x  T
                     82,500
3.  Who and what are
   likely to be impacted
   by contaminated
   ground water?
                                        Ground
                                         Water
                                       Pathway
                                         Score
                                                                  OH* 6
                     Ground Water Pathway Evaluation

                   Waste characteristics (WC)
                    • Determined during source characterization

                   Likelihood of re/ease (LR)
                    • Suspected release
                    • No suspected release
                   Targets (T)
                    • Primary targets
                    • Secondary targets
        PA Guidance, section 3.3
                                                       OH* 6
Ground Wirier Pathway
page 4-4
                                                              4/94

-------
                         • GROUND WATER PATHWAY
                     Ground Water Pathway Criteria List

               Contains elements to consider when determining whether
               suspected release exists
               Contains issues to consider when determining whether any
               drinking water wells are primary targets
               Not a tally sheet
               Consider other site-specific issues
                          Go to PA Guidance, appendix A,
               pages A-12 and A-13, Ground Water Pathway Criteria List
        PA Guidance, appendix A
              OH«7
              Special Considerations for Likelihood of Release:
                               Depth to Aquifer
       Depth to Water
               22 feet
Maximum Depth
of Wastes 5 feet
                                                    Depth to Aquifer
                                                    22 feet -5 feet = 17 feet
                                   AQUIFER j
     Depth to Aquifer =  Depth to Ground Water from Surface
                        Minus Maximum Depth of Waste
         Not to Scale
        PA Guidance, section 3.3.1, page 56
              OH* 8
4/94
       Ground Water Pathway
                  page 4-5

-------
                          •  GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
               Special Considerations for Likelihood of Release:
                                   Karst Terrain

               Definition:  Terrain with unique characteristics of relief and
               drainage due to a high degree of rock solubility

               • Majority of karst conditions occur in limestone areas, but can also
                occur in dolomite, gypsum, and salt deposits

               • Karst characteristics: Cavernous porosity, disappearing streams,
                abundant springs, and very high transmissivity
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.1, page 57                                     OH • 9
                              Likelihood of Release

                     "Suspected Release" or "No Suspected Release"

                Suspected release: high likelihood hazardous substance has
                been released to ground water

                No suspected release: low likelihood of release
                Requires professional judgment based on site and pathway
                conditions
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.1, pages 59 and 60                             OH • 10
Ground Water Pathway                                                              4/94
page 4-6

-------
                         • GROUND WATER PATHWAY
                           Likelihood of Release
        a) How likely are hazardous
           substances to escape from
           source?
b) Once substances have
   escaped from source, how
   likely are they to reach
   ground water?
                                                                  OH* 11
                                  Example

                    Suspected Release or No Suspected Release
                                                                  OH* 12
4/94
                   Ground Water Pathway
                             page 4-7

-------
                             GROUND WATER PATHWAY
                              Ground Water Targets

                Drinking water supply wells located within 4 miles of the site
                Ground water target = well
                Ground water population = people served by well
                Primary targets are determined by likelihood of exposure
                Secondary targets are distance-weighted
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2                                           OH • 13
V
                              Ground Water Targets

            Multiple aquifers

               • Evaluate all ground water sources within 4 miles as targets,
                 regardless of aquifer from which they draw
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2                                           OH • 14
Ground Water Pathway                                                              4/94
page 4-8

-------
                            GROUND WATER PATHWAY  •
V
                             Ground Water Targets

                    At PA, conduct comprehensive target survey
                      • Municipal wells
                      • Community wells
                      • Private wells

                    Need to know
                      • Well locations
                      • Number of people served

                    All targets must be plotted on a map


         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2                                         OH • 15
                             Ground Water Targets

           Nearest drinking water well

              • PA considers proximity of nearest drinking water well
              • Consult local water authorities for municipal systems
              • Conduct "windshield" survey for private wells
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2                                         OH • 16
4/94                                                            Ground Water Pathway
                                                                          page 4-9

-------
                            GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
                             Ground Water Targets

            Target distance categories

               • A series of concentric circles around the site with radii of % mile,
                V& mile, 1 mile, 2 miles, 3 miles, and 4 miles is drawn on a
                topographic map
               • Distance circles are used to evaluate secondary drinking water
                target populations
               • Distance is measured from nearest source to well, not population
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2
OH* 17
                             Ground Water Targets

                             Target distance categories
                        (Not to scale)



A = people served
by well A
B = people served
by well B
                                                                       OH* 18
Ground Wator Pathway
page 4-10
         4/94

-------
                            GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
                             Ground Water Targets

            Blended municipal systems

              • Definition: entire system is interconnected by valves or
                connecting lines so that water drawn from any supply well and/or
                intake can reach any user of the system
              • For blended systems, assign a population to each well or water
                intake
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, pages 62-64                                OH • 19
V
                             Ground Water Targets

           Blended municipal systems:  apportionment of population

              • Apportionment is based on each well's contribution
              • Base apportionment on average annual production
              • Apportionment is not necessary if any well serving the system is a
                primary target
              • Apportionment is not necessary if all system wells are in one
                target distance category
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2                                          OH • 20
4/94                                                             Ground Water Pathway
                                                                          page 4-11

-------
                          • GROUND WATER PATHWAY
                             Ground Water Targets

              Blended municipal systems: apportionment of population
                               The "40-Percent Rule"

               • If any supply well or intake in a blended system contributes 40
                percent or more of the system's annual production, apportion
                population to each well based on percent contribution
               • If all supply wells and/or intakes contribute less than 40 percent,
                apportion population equally among all
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, page 63                                   OH • 21
V	
         Notes:
GroundWatarPtthwty                                                             4/94
page 4-12

-------
                        GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
                Mini Exercise: Blended Municipal Well System
                            The 40-Percent Rule
                                          DW-1
                DW-2
                                    
-------
                            GROUND WATER PATHWAY
                              Ground Water Targets

            Worker and student populations

               • Should be evaluated if they are served by ground water drawn
                from within 1 mile of source
               • Generally, do not spend time collecting information about
                populations outside of 1  mile because distance-weighting will
                greatly reduce their significance
                                                                       OH* 23

                                                                      	J
                              Ground Water Targets

            Primary or secondary target wells

               • Primary targets: high likelihood drinking water wells in question
                have been exposed to hazardous substances from site
               • Secondary targets: low likelihood of exposure
               • Requires professional judgment based on site, pathway, and
                target characteristics
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, page 65                                    OH • 24
Ground Water Pathway                                                             4/94
page 4-14

-------
                             GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
                              Ground Water Targets

            Primary target population

               • Definition: the human population served by drinking water from
                 primary target wells
               • Primary targets are possible only if a release is suspected
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, pages 66-70                                 OH • 25
        	J
                              Ground Water Targets

            Ground water criteria list

               • Primary target well selection is based on:
                 -  Characteristics of site and environs
                 -  Sources, types, and quantities of wastes
                 -  Proximity of well to source(s)
                 -  Characteristics of the well

               • Primary target wells are identified using the Ground Water
                 Pathway Criteria List (PA Guidance, appendix A, page A-13)

         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, pages 66-70                                 OH • 26
4/94                                                               Ground Water Pathway
                                                                            page 4-15

-------
                             GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
                              Ground Water Targets
            Secondary target population

            Definition:  the human population served by drinking water drawn
                        from secondary target wells
               • If no release  is suspected, all targets are evaluated as secondary
                 targets
               • If a release is suspected, some targets may be evaluated as
                 primary targets and others as secondary targets
               • Populations are distance-weighted based on the distance
                 category in which wells are located
               • Populations served by wells located in inner rings carry more
                 "weight" because contaminants become diluted as they migrate
                 outward
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, pages 71-72                                 OH • 27
V _ . _
                              Ground Water Targets

            Wellhead protection area (WHPA)

            Definition:  a state-designated area restricting certain land uses
                        and industrial practices around drinking water wells
               • Consider if any onsite sources or primary targets are located
                 within a designated WHPA
               • Also consider if neither of the above apply but any part of a
                 designated WHPA is located within 4 miles of the site
         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, page 74                                    OH • 28
GroundWatarPathway                                                               4/94
page 4-16

-------
                          • GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
                            Ground Water Targets

         Resources

         Definition: use of ground water for purposes other than drinking water

            • Irrigation of commercial crops
            • Watering of commercial livestock
            • Commercial food preparation
            • Recreation
            • Generally, do not expend significant effort evaluating resources
             during PA
            • Usually assigned a default value of 5 points

         PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, page 75                                OH • 29
                       Ground Water Pathway Scoresheet

                 PA Guidance, appendix A, pages A-14 through A-17
                 Directions found in PA Guidance, section 3.3.2, and in appendix A
                 Secondary target population values determined using PA Table 2,
                 Values For Secondary Ground Water Target Populations
                           Go to PA Guidance, appendix A,
                    Ground Water Pathway Score Sheet, page A-15
                                                                     OH* 30
4/94                                                             Ground Water Pathway
                                                                          page 4-17

-------
                                                                                                                             8
                                  GROUND WATER PATHWAY SCORESHEET
                                              ftifiwty Cltmrtatnttict
           Do you suspect a release (see Ground Water Pathway Criteria List, page 7)7
           Is the site located in karst terrain?
           Depth to aquifer:
           Distance to the nearest drinking water well:
                                                                                       Yes	  No
                                                                                       Yes      No
  LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
  1.  SUSPECTED RELEASE:  If you suspect a release to ground water (see page 7),
     assign a score of 550. Use only column A for this pathway.

  2.  NO SUSPECTED RELEASE:  If you do not suspect a release to ground water, and
     the site is in karst terrain or the depth to aquifer is 70 feet or less, assign a score
     of 500; otherwise, assign a score of 340. Use only column B (or this pathway.
                                                                          LR  -
  TARGETS
3.  PRIMARY TARGET POPULATION: Determine the number of people served by
   drinking water wells that you suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
   substance from the site (see Ground Water Pathway Criteria List, page 7).
                                                        _ people x
                                                                           10
  4.  SECONDARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number of people served by
     drinking water wells that you do NOT suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
     substance from the site, and assign the total population score from PA Table 2.
           Are any wells part of a blended system?    Yes _  No _
           If yes, attach a page to show apportionment calculations.

  5.  NEAREST WELL:  If  you have identified a primary target population for ground
     water, assign a score of 50; otherwise, assign the  Nearest Well score from
     PA Table 2. If no drinking water wells exist within 4 miles, assign a score of zero.

  6.  WELLHEAD PROTECTION AREA (WHPA): If any source lies within or above a WHPA,
     or if you have identified any primary target well within a WHPA, assign a score of 20:
     assign 5 if neither condition holds but a WHPA is present within 4 miles; otherwise
     assign zero.

  7.  RESOURCES
                                                                                            IN.ll.M.3.1. -
                                                                            T -
  WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
  8. A. If you have identified any primary target for ground water, assign the waste
        characteristics score calculated on page 4, or a score of 32, whichever is
        GREATER; do not evaluate part B of this factor.

     B. If you have NOT identified any primary target for ground water, assign the
        waste characteristics score calculated on page 4.
                                                                         WC
  GROUND WATER PATHWAY SCORE:
                                                         LR  x T x  WC
                                                               82,500
(tub^ct to * nuiimum of
1001
Ground Water Pathway
page 4-18
                                                      A-15

-------
                             PA TABLE 2:  VALUES FOR SECONDARY GROUND WATER TARGET POPULATIONS

                                                   PA Table 2a:  Non-Karst Aquifers
Distance
from Sfte
0 to X. milo
> )4 to y, mile
> 54 to 1 milo
> 1 to 2 miles
>2 to 3 miles
> 3 to 4 miles
Population







Nearest Well =
Nearest
Well
fchoose
highest}
20
18
9
5
3
2

Population Served by Wells Within Distance Category
i
to
10
i
1
1
1
1
1
11
to
30
2
i
i
i
i
i
31
to
100
5
3
2
1
1
1
101
to
300
16
10
5
3
2
1
301
to
1.000
52
32
17
9
7
4
1.001
to
3.0OO
163
101
52
29
21
13
3.001
to
10.0OO
521
323
167
94
68
42
1O.OO1
to
30,000
1.633
1.012
522
294
212
131
f
30.O01
to
1OO.OOO
5.214
3,233
1.668
939
678
417
Qrwmtmr
thmn
1OO.OOO
16,325
10.121
5.224
2.938
2.122
1.306
Score =
Population
Value








                                                     PA Table 2b: Karst Aquifers
Distance
from Site
0 to X. mile
> X to K mile
> H to 1 mila
> 1 to 2 miloi
> 2 to 3 milei
> 3 to 4 miloi
Population






Nearest Well -
Nearest
Well
luse 20
for karstl
20
20
20
2O
20
20

Population Served by Wells Within Distance Category
i
to
70
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
10
30
2
1
1
1
, 1
1
31
to
100
5
3
3
3
3
3
101
to
3OO
16
10
8
a
8
8
301
to
1.OOO
52
32
26
26
26
26
1.001
to
3.OOO
163
101
82
82
82
82
3.001
to
1O.OOO
521
323
261
261
261
261
10.00 1
to
3O.OOO
1.633
1.012
816
816
816
816
*
30.0O1
to
1OO.OOO
5.214
3.233
2,607
2.607
2.607
2.6O7
Qrwmtmr
thmn
1OO.OOO
16.325
10.121
8.162
8.162
8.162
8.162
Score —
Population
Value







  Q.
  sr
•o •«
OJ t)
(0 ft)

-------
                         • GROUND WATER PATHWAY
         Mini  Exercise:  Secondary Ground Water Target Population
         ,DW-1
          1.8 miles from source;
          serves 1,500 people
         Town of Baker has 3 wells
         of equal capacity serving
         2,700 people
     DW-2
     0.8 miles from source;
     serves 842 people
                          DW-5
                          5.2 miles from source;
                          serves town of Baker
                                     SOURCE
                            DW-4
                            2.5 miles from source;
                            serves town of Baker
            DW-3
            0.4 miles from source;
            serves town of Baker
                                                                    OH* 31
         Mini Exercise: Secondary Ground Water Target Population
        Distance
        Category (mi.)

            0-1/4
          1/4 -1/2
          1/2-1
            1-2
            2-3
            3-4
Number
Of People
Distance-Weighted
Population
                                                                    OH* 32
Ground WtterPtthwty
page 4-20
                                               4/94

-------
                          • GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
               Mini Exercise:  Ground Water Target Population
            DW-3
            2.4 miles from source;
            serves 842 people
        DW-1
        0.3 miles Irom source;
        serves 25 people
                                (Contaminant plume)
                   (Not to scale)
DW-2
1.3 miles Irom source;
serves 137 people
Well
DW-1
DW-2
DW-3
Primary or
Secondary



Distance Category



Population
•


Population Value
for Secondary Targets



                                                                       OH* 33
4/94
              Ground Water Pithway
                        page 4-21

-------
                   • GROUND WATER PATHWAY •
                     Ground Water Scoring
          WC  x  LR
                 82,500
Ground
 Water
Pathway
 Score
                                                  OH* 34
    Notes:
Ground Water Pathway
page 4-22
                   4/94

-------
                          • GROUND WATER PATHWAY •


                       CASE STUDY: ABC VACUUM SERVICE

                            GROUND WATER PATHWAY
OBJECTIVE

Using background information from file searches, site reconnaissance notes, reference materi-
als, maps, and phone conversation records, complete the "Ground Water Pathway" portion of
the PA scoresheets.

METHOD

      1.  Review the general ground water pathway information summary provided below and
         the file information included with this exercise.


      2.  Using the information provided, complete the "Ground Water Use Description"
         section of the PA scoresheets.


      3.  Read the instructions for the "Ground Water Pathway Criteria List" and complete the
         "Suspected Release" and "Primary Targets" evaluations. Determine whether you
         hypothesize a suspected release and identify whether there are any primary targets.
         Summarize the rationale for these decisions in the space provided.


      4.  Using the existing site information and the scoresheet instructions, complete all the
         portions of the "Ground Water Pathway Scoresheet." PA Table 2, Values for
         Secondary Ground Water Target Populations, should be used to determine
         population values for secondary targets if applicable.  Remember to evaluate the
         "Nearest Well" category.


      5.  Calculate and record the ground water pathway score.

 Ground Water Pathway:

      • There are two aquifers of concern:
       - A shallow, water-table aquifer (depth to water = 30 feet) that consists mainly of fine-
         to coarse-grained sands
       - A deeper aquifer (depth to water = 160 feet) that consists mainly of fine- to coarse-
         grained sands and gravel
      • Five nearby residences use private wells that tap the shallow aquifer.
4/94                                                              Ground Water Pathway
                                                                           page 4-23

-------
                             GROUND WATER PATHWAY
      • No other private wells exist within 4 miles of the site.

      • A blended municipal well system is present within 1 mile of the site.
        - The total population served is 8,900.
        - The wells tap the deeper aquifer and are screened at approximately 195 feet.

      • Ground water is also used in commercial crawfish farms.

      • No wellhead protection area is located within 4 miles of the site.

      • The site is not located in an area of karst terrain.


Municipal Well System Apportionment:
WELL
IDENTIFICATION
Well A
WellB
WellC
DISTANCE
FROM SITE
2,800 feet
(0.45 miles)
4,000 feet
(0.76 miles)
4,000 feet
(0.76 miles)
PERCENT ANNUAL
PRODUCTION
30
35
35
Ground WttorPtthwty
page 4-24
4/94

-------
ABC Vacuum Service
                                          iffiM
                                          Stained
: •! i •! i •! i •! i •! i •:: v: •!: •:: •: t
Stained soil
                                                               1: •.: -V •"! '•'.• '•'• '•'.•"'!: -*!: -*!: -0
                                  Debris—t:::K:0xidatton
                                  I—i  pads
                                     Warehouse
                          Septic
                           tank
                                                            Private well

                                                            Property boundary
                                                          Standing ••:
                                                          rainwater
                                   Rubbish
                                     pile
                                                Not to Scale

-------
                ABC Vacuum Service
                                                 Residential
  \15'
Ground Water Pathway
cage 4-26
                                                         \

-------
Geology Of Atlas Parish, Louisiana


By MARY CLARKE
U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1989
                                              Ground Water Pathway
                                                      page 4-27

-------
       HYDROGEOLOGIC SETTING

             Atlas Parish is situated in the subtropical zone along the borders of the Mississipi
       River.  Annual precipitation for this region averages 57 inches and is the major source of
       recharge for the aquifers of the area.
             GEOLOGIC FRAMEWORK

                   The Atlas  Parish  aquifer  system consists  of two  aquifers  of similar
       composition. The shallow aquifer is composed of alluvial sediments, namely fine-to-coarse
       grained sands,  and has a depth to water of approximately 30 feet  The deeper aquifer
       consists mainly of fine-to-coarse grained sands and gravels with depth to   water  being
       estimated at 160 feet  As a result of these compositions,  permeabilities for both aquifers
       are high.
Ground Water Pathway
page 4-28

-------
                          PHONE CONVERSATION RECORD
                                                                       Originator
Conversation with:


Name .
 Company

        C-A
 Address ^r***4L
         n C,  Co -*, •»< ~l^tj>«*
 Phone.
 Subject
                                              3/Oh
  Originator Placed Call


C Originator Received Call


w.o. NO.
                                                                               er
 NO«M:
G Tickle File.
I] Fdlow-Up By: _


G Copy/Route To:
                                               Follow-Up-Action:.
                                              Originator's Initials.
                                                                     . Ground Water Pathway

                                                                                page 4-29

-------
                                     GROUND WATER PATHWAY


 Ground Water Use Description: Provide information on ground water use in the vicinity.  Present the general
 stratigraphy, aquifers used, and distribution of private and municipal wells.

 Calculations for Drinking Watar Populations Served by Ground Water: Provide populations from private wells
 and municipal supply systems in each distance category. Show apportionment calculations lor blended supply
  systems.
Ground Water Pathway
page 4-30                                        A'10

-------
                               GROUND WATER PATHWAY
                           GROUND WATER USE DESCRIPTION
Describe Ground Water Use Within 4-miles of the Site:
(Describe stratigraphy, information on aquifers, municipal and/or private wells)
Calculations for Drinking Water Populations Served by Ground Water:
                                                                      Ground Water Pathway
                                                                                 page 4-31
                                         A-11

-------
                             GROUND WATER PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
   This "Criteria List" helps guide the process of developing hypotheses concerning the occurrence of a
   suspected release and the exposure of specific targets to a hazardous substance.  The check-boxes
   record your professional judgment in evaluating these factors.  Answers to all of the listed questions
   may not be  available during the PA.  Also, the list is not all-inclusive; if other criteria help shape your
   hypotheses, list them at the bottom of the page or attach an additional page.

   The "Suspected Release" section identifies several  site,  source, and pathway conditions that could
   provide insight as to whether  a release from the  site is likely to have occurred.  If a  release  is
   suspected, use the "Primary Targets" section to evaluate conditions that may help identify targets
   likely to be exposed  to a hazardous  substance.  Record responses  for the well that you feel has the
   highest probability of being exposed  to a hazardous substance.  You may use this section of the chart
   more than once, depending on the number of targets you feel may  be considered "primary."

   Check the boxes to indicate  a "yes," "no," or "unknown" answer to each question. If you check the
   "Suspected Release" box as  "yes," make sure you assign a Likelihood of Release value of 550 for the
   pathway.
Ground Water Pathway
page 4-32                                       A-12

-------
                              GROUND WATER  PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
                SUSPECTED RELEASE
                                                              PRIMARY TARGETS
Y  N  U
a  o  n
s     k
ODD

ODD
ODD

ODD

ODD

D D

ODD


ODD


ODD


ODD


D D

D D
Are sources poorly contained?

Is the source a type likely to contribute to
ground water contamination (e.g., wet
lagoon)?

Is waste quantity particularly large?

Is precipitation heavy?

Is the infiltration rate high?

Is the site loc.ited in an area of karst terrain?

Is the subsurface highly permeable or
conductive?

Is drinking water drawn from a shallow
aquifer?

Are suspected contaminants highly mobile in
ground water?

Does analytical or circumstantial evidence
suggest ground water contamination?

Other criteria?	

SUSPECTED RELEASE?
Y  N   U
eon
s      k
D D  D

ODD
D D  D


ODD


ODD



ODD
Is any drinking water well nearby?

Has any nearby drinking water well been
closed?

Has any nearby drinking water user reported
foul-tasting or foul-smelling water?

Does any nearby well have a large drawdown
or high production rate?

Is any drinking water well located between the
site and  other wells that are suspected to be
exposed to a hazardous substance?

Does analytical or circumstantial evidence
suggest  contamination  at a drinking water
well?
D O  O  Does any drinking water well warrant
          sampling?
D D

D 'D
Other-criteria?
PRIMARY TARGET(S) IDENTIFIED?
Summarize the rationale for Suspected Release (attach an
additional page if necessary):
                                             Summarize the rationale for Primary Targets (attach an
                                             additional page if necessary):
                                                   A-13
                                                                                          Ground Water Pathway
                                                                                                        page 4-33

-------
                                  GROUND WATER PATHWAY SCORESHEET

    Pathway Characteristics
    Answer the questions at the top of the page. Refer to the Ground Water Pathway Criteria List (page 7) to
    hypothesize whether you  suspect that a hazardous substance associated with  the site has been released to
    ground water.  Record depth to aquifer (in feet): the difference between the deepest occurrence of a hazardous
    substance and the depth  of the top of the shallowest aquifer at lor  as  near as possible) to the site. Note
    whether the site is in karst terrain (characterized by abrupt ridges, sink holes, caverns, springs, disappearing
    streams).  Record the distance (in feet) from any source to the nearest well used for drinking water.

    Likelihood of Release (LR)

    1.  Suspected  Release: Hypothesize based on professional judgment guided by the Ground Water Pathway
    Criteria List (page 7).  If you suspect a release to ground water, use only Column A  for this pathway and do
    not evaluate factor 2.
    2.  No Suspected Release:  If you  do  not suspect a release, determine  score  based on  depth to aquifer or
    whether the site is in an area of karst terrain.  If you do not suspect a release to ground water, use only Column
    B to score this pathway.
    Targets (T) .

    This  factor category evaluates the  threat to populations obtaining drinking water from  ground waiter.   To
    apportion populations served by blended drinking water supply systems, determine the percentage of population
    served by  each well based on its production.
    3.  Primary Target Population: Evaluate populations served by all drinking water wells that you suspect have
    been exposed to a hazardous substance released from the site. Use professional judgment guided by the Ground
    Water Pathway Criteria List (page 7) to make this determination.  In the space provided, enter the population
    served by any wells you suspect have been exposed to a hazardous substance from the site. If only the number
    of  residences is known, use the average county residents per household (rounded up to  the next integer) to
    determine population served. Multiply the population by 10 to determine the Primary Target Population score.
    Note that if you do not suspect  a release, there can be no primary target population.
    4.  Secondary  Target Population: Evaluate populations served by all drinking water wells within 4 miles  that
    you do not suspect have been exposed to a hazardous substance. Use PA Table 2a or 2b (for wells drawing
    from non-karst and karst aquifers, respectfully) (page 9).  If only the number of residences is known,  use  the
    average county residents per household (rounded to the nearest integer) to determine population served. Circle
    the assigned value for the population in each distance category and enter it in the column  on the far-right side
    of  the table. Sum the far-right column and enter the total as the Secondary Target Population factor score.

    5.  Nearest Well  represents the threat posed to the drinking water well that is most likely to be exposed  to a
    hazardous substance. If you have identified a primary target population, enter 50. Otherwise, assign the score
    from PA Table 2a or 2b for the closest distance category with a drinking water well population.

    6.  Wellhead Protection Area (WHPA):  WHPAs  are special areas designated by States  for protection under
    Section 1428  of the Safe Drinking Water Act.  Local/State and EPA Regional water officials can provide
    information regarding the location of WHPAs.
    7.  Resources: A score of 5 can generally be assigned as a default measure. Assign zero  only if ground water
    within 4 miles  has no resource use.

    Sum the target scores in Column A (Suspected Release) or Column B (No Suspected Release).

    Waste Characteristics (WC)

    8.  Waste Characteristics: Score is assigned from page 4.  However, if you have identified any primary targe:
    for ground water, assign either the  score calculat-ed on page 4 or a score of 32, whichever is greater.

    Ground  Water  Pathway Score:  Multiply the scores for LR, T, and WC. Divide the product by 82,500.  Round
    the result  to the nearest integer. If the result is  greater than TOO, assign TOO.
Ground Water Pathway
page 4-34                                          A-I 4

-------
                                                                                                                           8
                                GROUND WATER PATHWAY SCORESHEET
                                            Ptthvtmy
         Do you suspect a release (see Ground Water Pathway Criteria List, page 7)7
         Is the site located in karst terrain?
         Depth to aquifer:
         Distance to the nearest drinking water well:
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
1. SUSPECTED RELEASE:  If you suspect a release to ground water (see page 7),
   assign a score of 550. Use only column A for this pathway.

2. NO SUSPECTED RELEASE: If you do not suspect a release to ground water, and
   the site is in karst terrain or the  depth to aquifer is 70 feet or less, assign a score
   of 500; otherwise, assign a score  of 340. Use only column B for this pathway.
                                                                        LR -
TARGETS
3.
4.
   PRIMARY TARGET POPULATION: Determine the number of people served by
   drinking water wells that you suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
   substance from the site (see Ground Water Pathway Criteria List, page 7).
                                                       	people x
                10
   SECONDARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number of people served by
   drinking water wells that you do NOT suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
   substance from the site, and assign the total population score from PA Table 2.
         Are any wells part of a blended system?   Yes	  No	
         If yes, attach a page to show apportionment calculations.

5.  NEAREST WELL:  If you have identified a primary target population for ground
   water, assign a score of 50; otherwise, assign the Nearest Well score from
   PA Table 2. If no drinking water wells exist within 4 miles, assign a score of zero.

6.  WELLHEAD PROTECTION AREA (WHPA):  If any source lies within or above a WHPA,
   or if you have identified any primary target well within a WHPA, assign a score of 20;
   assign 5 if neither condition holds but a WHPA is present within 4 miles; otherwise
   assign zero.

7.  RESOURCES
                                                                         T -
WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
8.  A. If you have identified any primary target for ground water, assign the waste
      characteristics score calculated on page 4, or a score of 32, whichever is
      GREATER; do not evaluate pan 8 of this factor.

   B. If you have NOT identified any primary target for ground water, assign the
      waste characteristics score calculated on page 4.  •
                                                                       we  -
GROUND WATER PATHWAY SCORE:
LR  x  T x  WC
                                                             82,500
liubOct u
i maximum of 100)
                                                   A-15
                                   Ground Water Pathway
                                                  page 4-35

-------
03
co
o
  -0
  I
                               PA TABLE 2: VALUES FOR SECONDARY GROUND WATER TARGET POPULATIONS


                                                    PA Table 2a:  Non-Karst Aquifers
Distance
from Sit*
0 to K mile
> K to K mile
>)4 to 1 mile
> 1 to 2 miles
> 2 to 3 miles
> 3 to 4 miles
Population







Nearest Well =
Nearest
Well
(choose
highest)
20
18
9
5
3
2

Population Served by Wells Within Distance Category
i
to
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
to
30
2
1
1
1
1
1
31
to
100
5
3
2
1
1
1
10 1
to
30O
16
10
5
3
2
1
301
to
1.OOO
52
32
17
9
7
4
1.0O1
to
3.OOO
163
101
52
29
21
13
3,OO 7
fo
70.0OO
521
323
167
94
68
42
10.O01
to
30.000
1.633
1.012
522
294
212
131
*
30.001
to
100.0OO
5.214
3,233
1.668
939
678
417
Qnmtmr
thmn
100.000
16,325
10.121
5.224
2,938
2.122
1.306
Score =
Population
Value








                                                      PA Table 2b:  Karst Aquifers
Distance
from Site
0 to K mile
> K to K mile
> H to 1 mile
> 1 to 2 mile*
> 2 to 3 mile*
> 3 to 4 mile*
Population






Nearest Well -
Nearest
Well
(use 20
for karstl
20
20
20
20
20
20

Population Served by Wells Within Distance Category
i
to
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
to
30
2
1
1
1
1
1
31
to
100
5
3
3
3
3
3
101
to
300
16
10
8
8
8
8
301
to
1.0OO
52
32
26
26
26
26
1.001
to
3.00O
163
101
82
82 .
82
82
3,007
to
10.000
521
323
261
261
261
261
70.001
to
30.000
1.633
1,012
816
816
816
816
/
3O.OO7
fo
100.OOO
5.214
3.233
2.607
2.6O7
2.6O7
2.6O7
Onmtor
thmn
10O.OOO
16,325
10.121
8.162
8.162
8.162
8,162
Score -
Population
Value








-------
      Section 5:
Surface Water Pathway
                             latoor

-------
                          •  SURFACE WATER PATHWAY  •
                            Surface Water Definition

                Surface water: naturally occurring, and some man made,
                perennial water bodies
                All surface water is eligible
                Intermittently flowing water bodies qualify as surface water in
                areas with less than 20 inches mean annual precipitation
                Overland flow must reach surface within 2 miles to score pathway
                               See PA Guidance, glossary,
                         for detailed definitions of water body types
         PA Guidance, section 3.4
OH*1
         Notes:
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-2
       11/94

-------
                         •  SURFACE WATER PATHWAY •
                 Contaminants Can Reach Surface Water by:
                               Runoff
       Overland flow
       Flood
       Ground water
       discharge to surface
       water
Runoff
                             Percolation
                                                   Flow
                                                                     OH* 2
                Site Assessment Questions for Surface Water
            1.  Have hazardous
               substances been
               deposited at site?
               If so, what? How
               much?
2.  What is the
   likelihood that
   hazardous
   substances have
   been released to
   surface water?
3.  Who and what are
   likely to be impacted
   by contaminated
   surface water?
                   WC x  LR  x  T     =
                          82,500
                     Surface
                      Water
                    Pathway
                      Score
        PA Guidance, section 3.4
                                       OHO
11/94
                                Surface Water Pathway
                                          page 5-3

-------
                           SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                      Surface Water Pathway Evaluation
                   Waste
               Characteristics
        PA Guidance, section 3.4
                                                      Drinking
                                                     Water Threat
H Likelihood of  I
  Release    |
                                                         I
Human Food
Chain Threat
                                                    Environmental
                                                       Threat
                                    OH* 4
                Characterize the Surface Water Migration Path

                   • Define overland segment
                   • Define "in-water" segment
                   • Determine flow(s) of the surface water body/bodies
                    to the 15-mile target distance limit
                   • Locate targets for all threats
         PA Guidance, section 3.4
                                    OH* 5
Surftce Water Pathway
page 5-4
                                          11/94

-------
                          •  SURFACE WATER PATHWAY •
                      Surface Water Information Sources

                 • USGS topographic maps, water resources reports
                 • State water reports
                 • Local water utility
                 • Soil Conservation Service field office
                 • U.S. and state fish and wildlife offices
                 • National Weather Service
                 • Site reconnaissance
         PA Guidance, section3.4.1                                           OH*6
                             Data Search Questions:
                             Surface Water Pathway

            Likelihood of Release
               • What is distance wastes must travel to surface water? Where
                does site drainage enter surface water?
               • Is site subject to flooding? What is flood frequency?

            Targets
               • Uses  of surface water downstream from site? Drinking? Fishing?
                Recreation?
               • Any wetlands or other sensitive environments downstream that
                could be impacted?

         PA Guidance, sections 3.4.1 and 3.4.2                                  OH • 7
11/94                                                            Surface Water Pathway
                                                                           page 5-5

-------
                            SURFACE WATER PATHWAY •
                              Likelihood of Release

            Suspected Release
               • Criteria list consideration
               • Summarize rationale for suspected release
               • Record decision on likelihood of release in "Pathway
                Characteristics" box on PA scoresheet
                     Go to PA Guidance, Criteria List for Suspected
                   Release to the Surface Water Pathway, pages 78-80
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.1 and appendix A, pages A-20 and A-21
OH* 8
         Notes:
Suifict Wafer Pathway
page 5-6
       11/94

-------
                               SURFACE WATER PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
                 SUSPECTED RELEASE
                                                                           PRIMARY TARGETS
Y  N   U
eon
s      k
ODD

D 0  D

ODD

ODD

D D  D

ODD


D D  D


ODD


D O  D

ODD

ODD


ODD


D D  O


D D

D D
Is surface water nearby?

Is waste quantity particularly large?

Is the drainage  area large?

Is rainfall heavy?

Is the infiltration rate low?

Are sources poorly contained or prone to
runoff or flooding?

Is a runoff route well defined (e.g., ditch or
channel leading to surface water)?

Is vegetation stressed along the probable run-
off route?

Are sediments or water unnaturally discolored?

Is wildlife unnaturally absent?

Has deposition  of waste into surface water
been  observed?

Is ground water discharge to surface water
likely?

Does  analytical or circumstantial evidence
suggest surface water contamination?

Other criteria?
Y  N   U
eon
s      k
D D  D  Is any target nearby?  If yes:

          D Drinking water intake
          D Fishery
          O Sensitive environment

D D  O  Has  any intake, fishery, or recreational area
          been closed?

D D  O  Does analytical or circumstantial evidence
          suggest surface water contamination at or
          downstream of a target?

ODD  Does any target warrant sampling?  If yes:

          O Drinking water intake
          D Fishery
          D Sensitive environment
D D

D.D

O D

D O
Other criteria?
PRIMARY INTAKE(S) IDENTIFIED?

PRIMARY FISHERYIIES) IDENTIFIED?

PRIMARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTfS]
IDENTIFIED?
SUSPECTED RELEASE?
Summarize the rationale for Suspected Release (attach an
additional page if necessary):
                                               Summarize the rationale for Primary Targets (attach an
                                               additional page if necessary):
                                                                                        Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                                       page 5-7
                                                     A-21

-------
                            SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                              Likelihood of Release

                           No Suspected Release
                            • Special considerations
                               - Distance to surface water
                               - Flood frequency
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.1                                           OH • 9
V	J
                              Likelihood of Release:
                            Distance to Surface Water

               Definition:   shortest distance runoff would follow from a source to
                           surface water
               • Measured along shortest drainage route ("as the water flows")
               • Probable point of entry (PPE):  point at which runoff from site
                most likely enters surface water
               • Identify runoff route and PPE on site sketch in PA scoresheet
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.1, pages 81 and 82                             OH • 10
Surface Water Pathway                                                             11/94
page 5-8

-------
                           SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                         Likelihood of Release:
                       Distance to Surface Water
                                                                    OH»11
                            Likelihood of Release:
                               Flood Frequency

                Locate site with respect to surface water floodplains
                Use FEMA flood insurance rate maps
                Record flood frequency in "Pathway Characteristics" box on PA
                scoresheet
        PA Guidance, section 3.4.1, page 83
      OH* 12
11/04
Suffice Water Pathway
          page 5-9

-------
                             SURFACE WATER PATHWAY •
                     Evaluate Three Separate Target Threats

                          Drinking water threat
                              People drinking surface water; drinking water intakes;
                              resources

                          Human food chain threat
                              People eating fish taken from surface water; fisheries


                          Environmental threat
                              Impacts to sensitive environments (including wetlands,
                              critical habitats, and national parks) along the surface
                              water route
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2
                                                         OH* 13
  1. Begin
  measuring in-
  water segment
  at PPE and
  continue
  downstream
  for 15 miles.
  X
Runoff
 route
                              Target Distance Limit
                                  1SmNn
                                 Downttraam
                                 front PPE
                     Go to PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, pages 87 and 88,
                                    for more examples
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, page 86
2. If in-water
segment ends in
a lake, ocean, or
coastal waters,
measure within
that water body
an arc from
mouth of stream
to shores of
receiving water
body.
                                                         OH* 14
Surftca Wrtor Pathway
page 5-10
                                                                 11/94

-------
                            SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                                     Targets:
                              Drinking Water Threat

                           • Identify drinking water intakes
                           • Identify nearest drinking water intake
                           • Determine flow rates at intakes
                           • Evaluate drinking water population
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2                                          OH • 15
V	
         Notes:
                                                                        OH* 16
11/94                                                              Surface Water Pathway
                                                                            page 5-11

-------
                            SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                                     Targets:
                              Drinking Water Threat

                     • Determine flow at target intakes
                       - Obtain average flow rate in cubic feet per second (cfs)
                       - Estimate using water body type (PA table 4, page A-25)
                     • Sources of information
                       - Local water authorities
                       - USGS water data reports
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, page 89                                    OH • 17
V
                                     Targets:
                              Drinking Water Threat

               Evaluate Drinking Water Population

                • Evaluate population served by each surface water intake

                • Estimate    __  Number of         Average number of
                  population  "~  service       X   persons per
                                connections       household

                • Apply rule of apportionment for "blended" systems


         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, page 90                                  OH • 18
Surface Water Pathway                                                            11/94
page 5-12

-------
                          • SURFACE WATER PATHWAY  •
                                     Targets:
                              Drinking Water Threat

            Primary drinking water targets
               • Target = intake
                Population = people served by intake
               • Primary target population identified using criteria list
                (appendix A, page A-21)
               • Primary target intake implies a high likelihood that hazardous
                substance has reached intake
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, page 97                                   OH • 19
                                     Targets:
                              Drinking Water Threat

            Secondary drinking water targets
               • Low likelihood that hazardous substance has reached intake
               • Secondary targets are dilution-weighted
               • Consider workers and students only when information is readily
                available
                                  Go to appendix A,
                             PA tables 3 and 4, page A-25
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, page 99                                   OH • 20
11/94                                                             Surface Water Pathway
                                                                           page 5-13

-------
                          • SURFACE WATER PATHWAY  •
                         Primary vs. Secondary Targets
                              Municipal
                               intake
                                                                       OH* 21
                                     Targets:
                              Drinking Water Threat

               • Resources: use of surface water for purposes other than
                drinking
               • Examples
                - Irrigation of commercial food or forage crops (5-acre minimum)
                - Watering of commercial livestock
                - Ingredient in commercial food preparation
                - Major or designated water recreation area
               • Generally, sufficient to assign value of 5 as default
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.1, page 102
OH* 22
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-14
        11/94

-------
                                         SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                   LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE AND DRINKING WATER THREAT SCORESHEET
          Do YOU suspect a release (see Surface Water Pathway Criteria List, page 11|?
          Distance to surface water:
          Flood frequency:
          What is the downstream distance 10 ihe nearest drinking water intake?
          Nearest fishery? 	miles  Dearest sensitive environment? 	
             Yes
                      No
    miles
                           yrs
miles
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
1.  SUSPECTED RELEASE: If you suspect a release to surface water (see page 1 11.
   assign a score of 550.  Use only column A for this pathway.

2.  NO SUSPECTED RELEASE:  If you do not suspect  a release to surface
   water, use the table below to assign a score based on distance to surface
   water and flood frequency.  Use only column B lor this pathway.
Distance to surface water £ 2.500 feet
Distance to surface water > 2.500 feet, and
Site in annual or 10-year tloodplain
Site in 100-year floodplain
Site m 500-year Moodplain
Site outside 500-year lloodpiain
500

500
4OO
300
too
DRINKING WATER THREAT TARGETS
3. Record the water body type, flow |i( applicable), and number of people served
   by each drinking water intake within the target distance limit.  If (here is no
   drinking water intake within the target distance limn, factors *. 5. and 6
   each receive zero scores.
Intik* N*m*
Wttff SooV Tyf" Row ftofJt 5~v«y
els
cfs
els
   PRIMARY TARGET POPULATION: If you suspect any drinking water intake listed
   aoove has been exposed to a hazardous  substance from the site (see Surface Water
   Pathway Criteria List, page 1 1), list the intake name(s) and calculate the factor
   score based on the total population served.
                                                                people x  10 =
5.  SECONDARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number of people served by
    drinking water intakes that you do NOT suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
    substance from the site, and assign the total population score from PA Table 3.

          Are any intakes pan of a blended system?   Yes	  No	
          If yes. anach a page to show apportionment calculations.

6.  NEAREST INTAKE: If you have identified a primary  target population  lor the
    drinking water threat (factor 4), assign a score of 50: otherwise, assign the
    Nearest Intake score from PA Table 3. If no  drinking water intake exists within
    me target distance limit, assign a score of zero.

7   RESOURCES
                                                                           T -
                                                       A-23
                                                                                             Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                                             page 5-15

-------
                          • SURFACE WATER PATHWAY •
                                     Targets:
                           Human Food Chain Threat

                Fishery: area of a surface water body from which food chain
                organisms are taken, or could be taken, for human consumption
                Includes both commercial and sport fishing
                Identify all fisheries located between the PPE and the 15-mile
                TDL
                Identify by water body type or flow characteristics
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.1, page 91                                   OH • 23
                                     Targets:
                           Human Food Chain Threat

            Primary target fishery
               • It is highly likely that hazardous substances have reached the
                fishery
               • Identified using the criteria list (appendix A, page 22)

            Secondary target fishery
               • It is unlikely that hazardous substances have reached the fishery
               • Scored on the basis of flow rate
               • Evaluated only if a primary target is not identified
         PA Guidance, section3.4.2,pages 103and 104                          .  OH*24
SufftcaWMar Pithwiy                                                            11/94
page 5-16

-------
                                 SURFACE WATER PATHWAY (continued)
                              HUMAN FOOD CHAIN THREAT SCORESHEET
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
Enter Surlacc Water Likelihood of Release score from page 12. LR -
5u*^*crW
/?•/•*«•

AT« 5Mj>*aT«4
firftirt

HUMAN FOOD CHAIN THREAT TARGETS
8. Record the water body type and Mow (il applicable! lor each fishery within
   the target distance limit.  II there is no fishery within the target
   distance limit, assign a Targets score ol 0 at the bortom ol the page.
*./,~y /V.m. W.r~ »<«y >"H" flow
cts
cfs
cfs
cfs
cfs
9. PRIMARY FISHERIES:  If you susoect any fishery listed above has been exposed
   to a hazardous substance from the site Isee Surface Water Criteria List, page 1 1),
   assign a score ol 300 and do not evaluate Factor 10.  List the primary fisheries:
10. SECONDARY-FISHERIES

 A. If you suspect a release to surface water and have identified a secondary fishery
   but no primary fishery, assign a score ol 210.

 B. If you do not susoect a release, assign a Secondary Fisheries score from (he table
   below using the lowest How at any fishery within the target distance limit.
iowmmt Row
< 10 cfs
10 to 100 els
> 100 cts. coastal
tidal waters, oceans,
or Great Lakes
£*oo/>^«/y R*h*fi*e Soon
210
30
12
                                                                          T -
                                                       A-27
                                                                                               Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                                              page 5-17

-------
                             SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                                      Targets:
                              Environmental Threat

            Sensitive environment
               • General definition: terrestrial or aquatic resource, fragile natural
                 setting, or other area with unique or highly valued environmental
                 or cultural features
               • Most common type of sensitive environment is wetland

            Wetland
               • General definition: an area that is sufficiently inundated by
                 surface or ground water to support vegetation adapted for life in
                 saturated soil conditions
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, pages 92 and 93                              OH • 25
V      	
                                     Targets:
                              Environmental Threat

                Identify all sensitive environments in or adjacent to in-water
                segment
                PA table 5 (page A-31) lists sensitive environment types and
                assigned values
                Measure wetland frontage along water body; see PA table 6
                (page A-31) for assigned score
                Identify primary targets using criteria list
                                  Go to Appendix A,
                              tables 5 and 6, page A-31
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, pages 92 and 93                             OH • 26
Surface Water Pathway                                                              11/94
page 5-18

-------
                                 SURFACE WATER PATHWAY (continued)
                                 ENVIRONMENTAL THREAT SCORESHEET
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
Enter Surface Water Likelihood of Release score Irom page 12. LR -
5uMpM«*^
flt^Uf

H* Sutffatf^
A at***.
IMM.400_» - IOQ
ENVIRONMENTAL THREAT TARGETS
11.  Record the water body type and How (il applicable) lor each surface water
    sensitive environment within the target distance limit (see PA Tables 4
    and 51.  I' there is no sensitive environment within the target distance
    limit, assign a Targets score ol  0 at the bonom ot the page.
1 2. PRIMARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS:  II you suspect any sensitive environ-
    ment listed above has been exposed to a hazardous substance Irom the site (see
    Surface Water Criteria List, page  1 1), assign a score ol 300 and do not evaluate
    factor  13.  List the primary sensitive environments:
13. SECONDARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS: II sensitive environments are
    present, but none is a primary sensitive environment, evaluate Secondary
    Sensitive. Environments based on flow.

    A.  For secondary sensitive environments on surface water bodies with flows of
       100 els or less, assign scores as follows, and do not evaluate part B of
       this factor:
flow
cfs
els
els
cts
cfs
Ofc/DO/i W«yAr
IP A T,l>J. /;
X
X
X
X
X
£/Tv*nwvrvOT< Trp« * 100 els, assign a score of 10.
                                                                           T  -
                                                       A-29
                                                                                            Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                                           page 5-19

-------
                         • SURFACE WATER PATHWAY •
                            Surface Water Pathway
             we x LR x
             WC x LR x
             WC x LR x
82,500
82,500   =
82,500
SURFACE WATER
PATHWAY THREAT
     SCORES
                     Evaluate drinking water, human food chain, and
                     environmental threats (subject to noted maximums)
                     Sum scores for each threat to obtain overall pathway
                     score
         PA Guidance, section 3.4.2, page 108
                                 OH* 27
         Notes:
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-20
                                        11/94

-------
                          • SURFACE WATER PATHWAY  •


                       CASE STUDY: ABC VACUUM SERVICE

                            SURFACE WATER PATHWAY

OBJECTIVE

Using background information from file searches, site reconnaissance notes, and maps, com-
plete the "Surface Water Pathway" portion of the PA scoresheets.

METHOD

      1. Review the general surface water pathway information summary provided below and
         the map included with the exercise.

      2. Read the instructions for the surface water pathway criteria list and complete the
         "Suspected Release" and "Primary Targets" evaluations. Determine whether you
         hypothesize a suspected release and identify whether there are any primary targets.
         Summarize the rationale for these decisions in the space provided.


      3. Using the existing site information and the scoresheet instructions, complete all
         portions of the "Surface Water Pathway Scoresheet." PA Table 3, "Values for
         Secondary Surface Water Target Populations" and PA Table 4, "Surface Water
         Type/Flow Characteristics With Dilution Weights for Secondary Surface Water
         Sensitive Environments," should be used to determine population values for
         secondary targets if applicable.  Remember to evaluate the "Nearest Intake" factor.


      4. Calculate and record the surface water pathway score.


Surface Water Pathway:

      • Runoff is channeled into intermittent drainage ditches along the perimeter of the
        facility.

      • These drainage ditches flow 6,000 feet (1.1 miles) into the perennial ditch.

      • The perennial ditch reaches the bayou 3 miles from the site.


      • The bayou empties into a river 10 miles from the site.
11/94                                                             Surface Water Pathway
                                                                           page 5-21

-------
                          •  SURFACE WATER PATHWAY  •     =
      • Estimated flow rates:

       - Bayou = 15 cubic feet per second (cfs)
       - River = 75 cfs

      • Both the bayou and the river are used for fishing and swimming.

      • There are no surface water intakes within the 15-mile target distance limit.

      • The following sensitive environments are present:

       - A critical habitat for federally designated endangered species is located 14 miles
         downriver from the site.
       - A 5-acre wetland is located 12 miles downriver from the site. The wetland frontage
         equals 0.4 miles.

      • The site lies within the 500-year floodplain.

      • The drainage basin covers an area of about 165 acres.
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-22

-------
                     Site
       Perennial
         Ditch
 ABC Vacuum
     Service
Surface Water Map
     (not to scale)
          Endangered
            species
            habitat
                                Wetland
                                    15-Mile target
                                    distance limit
                                        Surface Water Pathway
                                               page 5-23

-------
                                    SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
     Migration Route  Sketch:   Sketch  the  surface  water  migration  pathway  (freehand is  acceptable)
     illustrating the drainage route and identifying water bodies, probable point of entry, flows, and targets.
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-24                                          A'18

-------
                                                                                             10
                              SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                              MIGRATION ROUTE SKETCH
Suface Water Migration Route Sketch:
(include runoff route, probable point of entry, 15-mile target distance limit, intakes, fisheries,
and sensitive environments)
                                       A-19
                                                                        Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                    page 5-25

-------
                                  SURFACE WATER PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
        This "Criteria List" helps guide the process of developing hypotheses concerning the occurrence of a
        suspected release and the exposure of specific targets to a hazardous substance.  The check-boxes
        record your professional judgment in evaluating these factors.  Answers to all of the listed questions
        may not be available during the PA.  Also, the list is not all-inclusive; if other criteria help shape your
        hypotheses, list them at the bottom of the page or attach an additional page.

        The  "Suspected  Release"  section identifies several  site,  source, and pathway conditions that could
        provide insight as to whether  a  release from the  site is likely to have  occurred.  If a release  is
        suspected, use the "Primary Targets" section to guide you through evaluation of some conditions that
        may help identify targets likely to be exposed to a hazardous  substance.  Record responses for the
        target that you feel has the highest probability of being exposed to a hazardous substance. You may
        use this section  of the chart  more than once, depending  on the number of targets you feel may be
        considered "primary."

        Check the boxes to indicate a "yes,"  "no," or "unknown" answer to each question. If you check the
        "Suspected Release" box as "yes," make sure you assign a Likelihood of Release value of 550 for the
        pathway.

        If the distance to surface water is greater than 2 miles, do not evaluate the surface water migration
        pathway.  Document the source of information in the text boxes  below the surface water  criteria list.
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-26                                            A-20

-------
                              SURFACE WATER PATHWAY CRITERIA  LIST
                 SUSPECTED RELEASE
                                                                PRIMARY TARGETS
Y  N   U
eon
s      k
D O  D

D a  a

ODD

oo  a

ODD

ODD

ODD

D D  a

D D  a

c D  a

ODD

ODD

C D  D

D G

a D
Is surface water nearby?

Is waste quantity particularly large?

Is the drainage area large?

Is rainfall heavy?

Is the infiltration rate  low?

Are sources poorly contained or prone to
runoff or flooding?

Is a runoff route well  defined (e.g., ditch or
channel leading to surface water)?

Is vegetation stressed along the probable run-
off route?

Are sediments or water unnaturally discolored?

Is wildlife unnaturally absent?

Has deposition of waste into surface water
been observed?

Is ground water discharge to surface water
likely?

Does analytical or circumstantial evidence
suggest surface water contamination?

Other criteria?
Y  N   U
eon
s      k
D D  D  Is any target nearby?  If yes:

          D Drinking water intake
          O Fishery
          D Sensitive environment

O O  O  Has any intake, fishery, or recreational area
          been closed?

D O  O  Does analytical or circumstantial evidence
          suggest surface water contamination at or
          downstream of a target?

ODD  Does any target warrant sampling?  If yes:

          D Drinking water intake
          D Fishery
          O Sensitive environment
D D

O D

D D

D O
Other criteria?
PRIMARY INTAKE(S) IDENTIFIED?

PRIMARY FISHERYIIESI IDENTIFIED?

PRIMARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENT(S)
IDENTIFIED?
SUSPECTED RELEASE?
Summarize the rationale for Suspected Release (attach an
additional page if necessary):
                                              Summarize the rationale for Primary Targets (attach en
                                              additional page if necessary):
                                                     A-21
                                                                                         Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                                       page 5-27

-------
         SURFACE WATER PATHWAY LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE AND DRINKING WATER THREAT SCORESHEET

      Pathway  Characteristics

      The surface water pathway includes three threats:   Drinking Wa,ter Threat, Human Food Cham Threat and
      Environmental Threat.  Answer the questions at the top of the page. Refer to the Surface Water Pathway Criteria
      List (page 11) to hypothesize whether you suspect that a hazardous substance associated with the site has been
      released to surface water.  Record the distance to surface water (the shortest overland drainage distance from
      a source  to a surface water body).  Record the flood frequency at the site (e.g., 100-yr, 200-yr).  if the  sue is
      located in more  than one floodplain, use the most frequent flooding event. Identify surface water use(s) along the
      surface water migration path and their distance(s) from the site.

      Likelihood of Release ILR)

      1. Suspected Release:  Hypothesize based on professional judgment guided by the Surface Water Pathway Criteria
      List (page 11). If you suspect a release to surface water, use only Column A for this pathway and do not evaluate
      factor 2.

      2. No Suspected  Release:  If you do not suspect a release, determine score based on the  shortest overland
      drainage distance from a source to a surface water body.  If distance to surface water is 2,500 feet or less, assign
      a score of 500.  If distance to surface water is greater than 2,500 feet, determine score based on flood frequency.
      If you do  not suspect a release to surface water,  use only Column B to score  this pathway.

      Drinking  Water Threat Targets (Tl

      3.  List all drinking water intakes on downstream  surface water bodies along the surface water migration path.
      Record the intake name, the type of water body on which the intake is located, the flow of the water body, and
      the number of people served by the intake (apportion the population if part of a blended system).

      4.  Primary Target Population: Evaluate populations served  by all drinking water intakes that you suspect have
      been exposed to a hazardous substance released from the site.  Use professional judgment guided by the Surface
      Water Pathway  Criteria  List (page 11) to make this determination.  In the space provided, enter the population
      served by all intakes you suspect have been exposed to a hazardous substance from the site. If only the number
      of residences is known, use the average  county  residents  per household (rounded  up to the next integer) to
      determine population served.  Multiply  by 10 to determine the Primary Target Population score.  Remember, if you
      do not suspect a release, there can be no  primary target population.

      5.  Secondary Target Population:  Evaluate  populations  served by all drinking water intakes within  the  targe;
      distance  limit that you do not suspect  have been exposed to  a hazardous substance.  Use PA Table 3 (page  1 3)
      and enter the  population served by intakes for each flow category.  If only the number of residences is known,
      use the average  county residents per household  (rounded to  the nearest integer) to determine population served.
      Circle the assigned value for the population in each flow category and  enter it in the column on the far-right side
      of the table.  Sum the far-right column and enter  the total as the Secondary Target Population factor  score.

      Gauging  station  data for many surface water bodies are  available from USGS  or other sources. In the absence
      of gauging station data, estimate flow using the list of surface water body types and  associated flow categories
      in PA Table 4 (page 13). The flow for  lakes is determined by  the sum of flows  of streams entering or leaving the
      lake.  Note that  the flow category "mixing zone of quiet flowing  rivers" is limited  to 3 miles from the probable
      point of entry.

      6.  Nearest Intake represents the threat posed to the drinking water intake that is most likely to be exposed to a
      hazardous substance. If you have identified a primary target population, enter 50.  Otherwise,  assign the'score
      from  PA  Table 3 (page 13) for the lowest-flowing water body on which there is an intake.

      7.  Resources:  A score  of 5 can generally be assigned as a  default measure.  Assign zero only if surface  water
      within tne target distance  limit has no resource  use.

      Sum the  target scores in Column A (Suspected  Release)  or Column B (No Suspected Release).


Surface Water Pathway
page  5-28
                                                      A-22

-------
                                                                                                                           12
                                        SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                   LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE AND DRINKING WATER THREAT SCORESHEET
                                               fiwty CflfffCtwOCM
          Do you suspect J release (see Surface Water Pathway Criteria List, page  11)?
          Distance to surface water:
          Flood frequency:
          What is the downstream distance 10 the nearest drinking water intake? 	miles
          Nearest fishery? 	miles    Nearest sensitive environment?  	miles
       Yes
                 No
                     yrs
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
1.  SUSPECTED RELEASE: If you suspect a release 10 surface water (see page 1 11,
   assign a score of 550.  Use only column A for this pathway.

2.  NO SUSPECTED RELEASE: If you do not suspect  a release to surface
   water, use the table below to assign a score based on distance to surface
   water and flood  frequency. Use only column B tor this pathway.
Distance to surface water £ 2.500 feel
Distance to surface water > 2. 500 feel, and
Sue in annual or 10-year lloodpiam
Site in 100-year lloodpiain
Site in 500-year tioooolam
Site outside 500-year floodpiam
500

500
4OO
300
too
                                                                         LR -
DRINKING WATER THREAT TARGETS
   Record the water body rype, flow |i< applicable), and number of people served
   by each drinking water intake within tne target distance limit. If there is no
   Ormking water intake within the target distance limit, factors *. 5. and 6
   each receive zero scores.
Inlikt Htm*
W»r«v SoaY Tvp* flow />•»>/>*• 5«rv«y
cts
els
cfs
   PRIMARY TARGET POPULATION:  If you suspect any drinking water intake listed
   aoove has been exposed to a hazardous substance from (he sue (see Surface Water
   Pathway Criteria List, page 11), list the intake namelsl and calculate the factor
   score based on the total population served.
                                                                people  x  10  =
5.  SECONDARY TARGET POPULATION:   Determine the number of people served by
    Ormking water intakes that you do NOT suspect nave been exposed to a hazardous
    substance from the site, and assign the total population score from PA Table 3.


          Are any intakes part of a blended system?   Yes	  No	
          if yes, anach a page to snow apportionment calculations.

6.  NEAREST INTAKE:  if you have identified a o'imarv target population for the
    onnking water threat (factor 4|, assign a score of 50: otherwise, assign me
    Nearest intake score from PA Table 3.  if no drinking water intake exists within
    me target distance limn, assign 3 score of zero

7   RESOURCES
1*0 M to I t .a
              IK 10 t t • a
                                                                          T  -
                                                       A-23
                                                                                             Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                                             page 5-29

-------
  "2 *»

  « §
  °> 2-
  en o
   •  »
PA TABLE 3: VALUES FOR SECONDARY SURFACE WATER TARGET POPULATIONS
Surface Water
Body Flow
flee PA Table 4)
<10 cl.
10 to IOO cfi
>1OO to 1.OOO cli
> l.OOO to 10.0OO cli
> 10.OOO cfi or
Giaal Lakai
3 mil* Mixing Zon«
Population







Nearest Intake =
Nearest
Intake
f choose
highest)
20
2
1
0
0
10

Population Served by Intakes WHhln Flow Category
1
i»
30
2
1
0
0
0
1
j;
fa
too
s
1
0
0
0
3
10}
la
300
16
2
1
0
0
8
301
It
l.OOO
S2
S
1
0
0
26
1.OO1
if
3.000
163
16
2
1
0
62
3.001
l»
10.OOO
521
S2
S
1
0
261
10.0O1
i»
30.000
1.633
163
16
2
1
816
30.O01
l»
10O.OOO
5.214
521
52
5
1
2.607
f OO.oo I
I*
300.000
16.325
1.633
163
16
2
8.162
30O.O0 1
to
1.000.000
52.136
5.214
521
52
S
26.068
Qf9»tmf
MM
l.OOO. OOO
163.246
16.325
1.633
163
16
81.663
Score -
PopuUtkut
V*!k*




	


ro

en
                                     PA TABLE 4: SURFACE WATER TYPE / FLOW CHARACTERISTICS


                           WITH DILUTION WEIGHTS FOR SECONDARY SURFACE WATER SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS
Typo of Surface
Water Body Type OR
minimal ilraam
•mall lo modarata itraam
modarala lo larga ilraam
larga tlraam to rivar
larga rivar
3-mila mixing jone of
quiat (lowing ilraam* or riven
coatlal tidal water (haibori.
• oundi, bays. ale.), ocaan.
or Graal Lakai
Water Body
Flow
< 10 cfi
10 lo lOOcd
> 100 to 1.000 el«
> 1.000 to 10.OOO cfi
> 10.0OO cfi

10 cfi or graatar

N/A

Dilution.
Weight
1
0.1
N/A
N/A
N/A

N/A

N/A


-------
           SURFACE WATER PATHWAY HUMAN FOOD CHAIN THREAT SCORESHEET

Likelihood of Release (LR)

LR is the same for all surface water pathway threats.  Ehter LR score from page 12.

Human Food Chain Threat Targets  (T)

8. The only human food chain targets are fisheries. A fishery is an area of a surface water body from
which food chain organisms are taken or could be taken for human consumption on a subsistence,
sporting, or commercial basis.  Food chain organisms include fish, shellfish, crustaceans, amphibians,
and amphibious reptiles.  Fisheries are delineated by changes in surface water body type (i.e., streams
and rivers, lakes, coastal tidal waters, and oceans/Great Lakes) and whenever the flow characteristics
of a stream or river change.

In the space provided, identify all fisheries within the target distance limit.  Indicate the surface water
body type and flow for each fishery.  Gauging station flow data are available for many surface water
bodies from USGS or other sources.  In the  absence  of gauging station  data, estimate flow using the
list of surface water body types and associated flow categories in PA Table 4 (page 1 3). The flow for
lakes is determined by the sum of flows of streams entering or leaving the lake. Note that, if there are
no fisheries within the target distance limit,  the Human Food Chain Threat Targets score is zero.

9. Primary fisheries are  any fisheries within the  target distance  limit that you suspect have been
exposed to a hazardous substance  released from the site.  Use professional judgment guided by the
Surface  Water Pathway Criteria List (page 1  1) to make  this determination.  If you identify any primary
fisheries, list them in the  space provided, enter 300 as the Primary Fisheries factor score, and do not
evaluate  Secondary Fisheries.   Note  that if you do not  suspect a release, there can  be  no  primary
fisheries.

10.  Secondary fisheries  are  fisheries that  you do not suspect have been exposed to a hazardous
substance.  Evaluate  this  factor only if fisheries are present within  the target distance limit, but none
is considered a primary fishery.

A.  If you suspect a release to surface water and have identified  a secondary fishery but no  primary
    fishery, assign a score of 210.

B.  If you  do not suspect a release, evaluate this factor based on flow.  In the absence of gauging
    station flow data, estimate flow using  the list of surface water body types and associated  flow
    categories in PA Table 4  (page 13). Assign a Secondary Fisheries score from  the table on the
    scoresheet using the lowest flow at any fishery within the target distance limit.  (Dilution weight
    multiplier does not apply to PA evaluation of this factor.)

Sum the target scores in  Column A (Suspected Release)  or Column B (No  Suspected Release).
                                            A-26
                                                                   Surface Water Pathway
                                                                               page 5-31

-------
                                 SURFACE WATER PATHWAY (continual
                               HUMAN FOOD CHAIN THREAT SCORESHEET
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
Enter Surface Water Likelihood of Release score from page 12. LR -
^ZT
IMA
N* SMpMtW
*•«•*••
1M0400JOO. IOI
Hmfmnnctt

 HUMAN FOOD CHAIN THREAT TARGETS
    Record the water body type and (low (if applicable! lor each fishery within
    the target distance limit. If there is no fishery within the target
    distance limit, assign a Targets score of 0 at the bottom of the page.
Ft,**, H.m. W.It,  100 cts. coastal
tidal waters, oceans.
or Great Lakes
Secondary Rmhmrit
M Scorm
210
30
12
                                                                         T -
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-32
                                                      A-27

-------
             SURFACE WATER PATHWAY ENVIRONMENTAL THREAT SCORESHEET

Likelihood of Release (LR)

LR is the same for all surface water pathway threats.  En,ter LR score from page 12.

Environmental Threat Targets (T)

11. PA Table 5 (page 16) lists sensitive environments for the Surface Water Pathway Environmental
Threat.  In the space provided, identify all sensitive environments located within the target distance
limit.  Indicate the surface water body type and flow at each sensitive environment.  Gauging station
flow data for many surface water bodies are available from USGS or other  sources. In the absence
of gauging station data, estimate flow using the list of surface water body types and associated flow
categories in PA Table 4 (page 13). The flow for lakes is determined  by the sum of flows of streams
entering or leaving the lake. Note that if there are no sensitive environments within the target distance
limit, the Environmental Threat Targets score is zero.

12.  Primary sensitive  environments are  surface water sensitive environments  within the  target
distance limit that you  suspect have been exposed to a  hazardous substance released from the site.
Use professional judgment guided by  the Surface Water Pathway  Criteria List (page 11) to make  this
determination.  If you identify any primary sensitive environments, list them in the space provided,
enter 300 as the Primary Sensitive  Environments factor score, and do not evaluate Secondary Sensitive
Environments.  Note that if you do not suspect a  release,  there can  be  no  primary  sensitive
environments.

13.  Secondary sensitive  environments are surface water sensitive  environments that you  do not
suspect have been exposed to a  hazardous substance. Evaluate this factor  only if surface  water
sensitive environments are present within the target distance limit, but none is considered a primary
sensitive environment.   Evaluate secondary sensitive environments based on flow.

   • In the table provided, list all secondary sensitive environments on surface water bodies with flow
    of  lOOcfs or less.

    1)  Use PA Table 4 (page 13)  to determine the appropriate dilution  weight  for  each.

    2)  Use  PA Tables  5  and 6  (page 16) to determine  the appropriate  value for each  sensitive
        environment type and for  wetlands frontage.

    3)  For a sensitive environment that falls into more than one of the categories in PA Table 5, sum
        the values for each type to determine the environment value (e.g.,  a wetland with  1.5 miles
        frontage  (value  of 50) that is also a critical habitat  for a Federally designated endangered
        species  (value of 100) would  receive a total value of 150).

    4)  For each sensitive environment, multiply the dilution weight by the environment type (or length
        of wetlands) value and record the product in the far-right  column.

    5)  Sum the  values in  the far-right  column and  enter the  total  as  the Secondary  Sensitive
        Environments score.  Do  not evaluate part B of this factor.

   • If all secondary sensitive environments are on surface  water  bodies with flows greater than  100
    cfs, assign 10 as the Secondary Sensitive Environments score.

Sum the target scores in Column  A (Suspected Release) or Column B (No Suspected Release).


                                                                    Surface Water Pathway
                                            A-28                                PaSe 5"33

-------
                                     SURFACE WATER PATHWAY (continued)
                                     ENVIRONMENTAL THREAT SCORESHEET
LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
Enter Surface Water Likelihood of Release score from page 12. LR -
Su*f~a**
/t«w««
iMa
M. 5ui*«o>W
* 100 cfs. assign a score of 10.
                                                                              T  -
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-34
                                                          A-29

-------
      PA TABLE  5:  SURFACE WATER AND  AIR  PATHWAY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS VALUES
Sensitive Environment
Criucal habitat lor Federally designated endangered or threatened species
Marine Sanctuary
National Park
Designated FedaraJ Wildefnaes Art*
Ecologically important nut identified under (ha Coaital Zone Wilderness Act
Stniitw« Areas id»nufi*d under tha Nauonal Estuary Program or Near Coastal Water Program of the Claan Water Act
Critical Araai Identified under tha Claan Lakee Program ol the Clean Water Act  Isubareas in lakaa or entire small lakes)
National Monumant (air pathway only)
National Seashore Recreation Area
National Lakashora Recreation Area
                     Assigned Valum
                            100
Habitat known to be used by Federally designated or proposed endangered or threatened spaciaa
National Preserve
Nauonal or State Wildlife Refuge
Unit of Coastal Barrier Resources System
Federal land designated for tha protection of natural ecosystems
Administratively Proposed Federal Wilderness Aree
Spawning ereaa  critical for tha maintenance of fish/shellfish species within a rivar system, bay, or estuary
Migratory pathwaye and feeding areas cntical for the mamtenencs of anadromous fish speciee in a rivar system
Terrestrial areas utilized  for breeding by large or dense aggregations of vertebrate animals (air pathway) or
     semi-aquatic foragara (surface water pathway)
National river reach designated as Recreational
                           75
Habitat known to be used by State designated endangered or threatened species
Habitat known to be used by a spaciee under review as to its Federal endangered or threatened starus
Coastal Sarnar (partially developed)
Federally designated Scenic or Wild Rivar
                           50
       •
Stale land designated for wildlife or game management
State designated Scervc or Wild River
Slata designated Natural Area
Particular areas, relatively small in size, important to maintenance of unique biotic communities
                           25
State deaignaiad areas lor protection/maintenance of aquatic lila under the Clean Water Act
Wetlands
Sea PA Table 6 (Surlaca Water Pathway)
                  or
       PA Table 9 (Air Pathway)
                                  PA TABLE  6:   SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
                                         WETLANDS FRONTAGE  VALUES
Total Length of Wetlands
Less than 0.1 mile
0.1 to 1 mile
Greater than 1 to 2 miles
Greater than 2 to 3 miles
Greater than 3 :o 4 miles
Greater than 4 to 8 milet
Greeter than 8 to 1 2 miles
Greater than 1 2 to 16 miles
Greater than 16 to 20 miles
Greater than 20 miles
Assigned Value
0
25
50
75
100
150
250
350
450
500
                                                        A-31
                                                                                             Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                                             page 5-35

-------
      SURFACE WATER PATHWAY WASTE CHARACTERISTICS. THREAT, AND PATHWAY SCORES

     Waste Characteristics (WC)

     14. Waste Characteristics: Score is assigned from page'4.  However, if a primary target has been
     identified for any surface water threat, assign either the score calculated on page 4 or a score of 32,
     whichever is greater.


     Surface Water Pathway Threat Scores

     Fill in the matrix with the appropriate scores from the previous pages. To calculate the score for each
     threat:  multiply the scores for LR, T, and WC; divide the product by 82,500; and round the result to
     the nearest integer. The Drinking Water Threat and Human Food Chain Threat are each subject to a
     maximum of 100. The Environmental Threat is subject to a maximum of 60.  Enter the rounded threat
     scores in the far-right  column.


     Surface Water Pathway Score

     Sum the individual threat scores to determine the Surface Water Pathway Score. If the sum is greater
     than 100, assign 100.
Surface Water Pathway
page 5-36                                       A 32

-------
                        SURFACE WATER PATHWAY (concluded)
         WASTE CHARACTERISTICS. THREAT, AND PATHWAY SCORE SUMMARY
WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
14. A. If YOU have identified any primary target for surface water (pages 12, 14,
      or 15), assign the waste characteristics score calculated on page 4, or a score
      of 32, whichever is GREATER; do not evaluate pan B of this factor.

   8. If you have NOT identified any primary target for surface water, assign  the
      waste characteristics score calculated on page 4.
HOOJ7. . Ill
                                                               we -
SURFACE WATER PATHWAY THREAT SCORES
Threat
Drinking Water
Human Food Chain
Environmental
Ukttihood ot
RrnJ**** ILK) Scor*
tfrom pty* 121



Jirgtu fTI Soar*
tpta*, 12. 14, 151



Pithwty W*«»»
Cti*rtd»niDc* fWCl Soon
td»t*nnin»d tbovml



Thrift Soon
LR t T i WC
/ 82. 500
|M«VM !• • I«^WW*I •* IOOI
IM^IM (• t ' "" 	 •* '°°*
.
                                            SURFACE WATER PATHWAY SCORE
       (Drinking Water Threat +  Human Food Chain Threat  -t- Environmental Threat)
                                             A-33
                                                                               Surface Water Pathway
                                                                                            page 5-37

-------
       Section 6:
Soil Exposure Pathway
            Fence

     , Breach
         H   M
             200 «Mt

            XYZ
          Corporation

-------
                          • SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
                             Soil Exposure Threat
              • People or other targets coming into direct contact with
                hazardous substances
              • Contaminated soil and accessible site wastes are evaluated
         PA Guidance, section 3.5                                           OH • 1
V	J
                      Site Assessment Questions 2 and 3
                               for Soil Exposure

              2. Is there suspected contamination?
              3. Do people live, go to school, or work on or within 200
                 feet of suspected contamination? Are there terrestrial
                 sensitive environments?
                                                                      OH* 2
So// Exposure Pathway                                                             4/94
page 6-2

-------
                            SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
                      Soil Exposure Pathway Evaluation
                                  Waste
                               Characteristics
                                    1
                                 Likelihood
                                of Exposure
                       Nearby Target
                        Population
                                            1
Resident Target
  Population
                        Resource
Environmental
Human
                                                                     OHO
                     Likelihood of Exposure and Targets



                                       Fence
                             inftnc*
                                   H      H
                                         200 tot
                                       XYZ
                                     Corporation
                                                                     OH* 4
4/94
                      Soil Exposure Pathway
                                page 6-3

-------
                            SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
                            Likelihood of Exposure

               • For most PAs, assume suspected surface
                contamination
               • Need appropriate quality analytical data to assume no
                suspected contamination
               • Score 550 for suspected contamination and score 0 for no
                suspected contamination
               • Determine area(s) of suspected contamination
               • Consider mechanisms to transport contaminants to nearby
                properties
         PA Guidance, section 3.5.1, pages 110 and 111                             OH • 5
                            Likelihood of Exposure:
                           Suspected Contamination
               Definition:  Areas known or suspected to contain hazardous
                          substances not covered by an essentially
                          impenetrable cover or more than 2 feet of clean cover
                          material

                          (Not limited to soils-any accessible surface source is
                          considered)
         PA Guidance, section 3.5.1                                           OH • 6
Soil Exposun Pathway                                                              4/94
page 6-4

-------
                           SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY •
                          Likelihood of Exposure:
                 What is Area of Suspected Contamination?
      Asphalt Paving
        PA Guidance, section 3.5.1
      OH* 7
                           Likelihood of Exposure

           Evaluate all sources except:
              • Sources covered by at least 2 feet of clean material or
               impenetrable cover
              • Sources not accessible by direct contact-
               Examples:
               - Wastes secured inside a building
               - Ground water plume with no identifiable source
        PA Guidance, section 3.5.1
      OH* 8
4/94
Soil Exposure Pathway
          page 6-5

-------

r









Soil Exposure Targets
Resident population threat
• Residents and students
• Workers
• Terrestrial sensitive environments
• Resources
Nearby population threat
• Residents within 1 mile of contamination
PA Guidance, section 3.5.2
V
^








OH* 9
J


Soil Exposure Targets:
Resident Population Threat Target Evaluation

Resident population factor is defined as:
• Person who resides on or within 200 feet of area of suspected
contamination
• Person who attends school or daycare on or within 200 feet of
area of suspected contamination
R
C
PA Guidai
V
'esident population is identified using the Soil Exposure Pathway
Criteria List
Turn to appendix A, Soil Exposure Pathway
Criteria List, page A-35
nee, section 3.5.2
OH* 10
J
Soil Exposure Pathway                                                                       4/94
page 6-6

-------
                               SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
             SUSPECTED CONTAMINATION
                RESIDENT POPULATION
Y  N   U
eon
a      k
DO  n
                                                                   Is any residence, school, or daycare facility on
                                                                   or within 200 feel of an area of suspected
                                                                   contamination?
    Surficial contamination can generally be assumed.
O O  O  Is any residence, school, or daycare facility
          located  on adjacent land previously owned or
          leased by the site owner/operator?

D D  D  Is there a migration route (hat might spread
          hazardous substances near residences,
          schools, or daycare facilities?

ODD  Have onsite  or adjacent residents or students
          reported adverse health effects, exclusive of
          apparent drinking water or air contamination
          problems?

D D  D  Does any neighboring property warrant
          sampling?
                                                         D  D
                                                         D  D
          Other criteria?
          RESIDENT POPULATION IDENTIFIED?
Summarize the rationale  for Resident Population (attach an additional page if necessary):
                                                                                         Sell Exposure Pathway
                                                                                                         page 6-7
                                                    A-35

-------
                            SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
                            Soil Exposure Targets:
                          Resident Population Threat
                                                    School
                                                   Playground
                                                                      OH«11
                             Soil Exposure Targets

            Resident population threat also includes:
               • Workers on facility property or nearby property
               • Terrestrial sensitive environments on the area of suspected
                contamination
               • Resources
                      Turn to appendix A, Table 7, Soil Exposure
                   Pathway Terrestrial Sensitive Environment Values
      PA Guidance, section 3.5.2
OH* 12
Soil Exposure Pathway
page 6-8
        4/94

-------
   PA TABLE 7: SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
TERRESTRIAL SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENT VALUES
Ttrrtstritl StnsHlv* fnyironmfrrt ' Assigned Vtlut
Terrestrial critical habitat lor Federally designated endangered or threatened species
National Par*
Designated Federal Wilderness Area
National Monument
Terrestrial habitat known to be used by Federally designaied or oroposeo threatened or enoangered species
National Preserve (terrestrial)
National or State terrestrial Wildlife Refuge
Federal land designated for protection of natural ecosystems
Administratively proposed Federal Wilderness Area
Terrestrial areas utilized by large or dense aggregations of animals (vertebrate speciesl for breeding
Terrestrial habitat used by State designated endangered or threatened species
Terrestrial habitat used by species under review for Federal designated endangered or threatened status
State lands designated for wildlife or game management
State designated Natural Areas
Panicular areas, relatively small in size, important to maintenance of unique biotic communities
100
75
50
25
                                          Soil Exposure Pathway
                A-39                                   Page 6-9

-------
                          • SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY •
                             Soil Exposure Targets

           Nearby population threat
              • Population that does not qualify as resident population but may
                come in contact with areas of contamination
              • Located within a 1-mile radius of site
Population Within
1 Mile
< 10,000
10,000-50,000
>50,000
Nearby Population
Threat Score
1
2
4
         PA Guidance, section 3.5.4
                                      OH* 13
                       Resident Population Threat Score
                             LE x T x WC

                                    82,500
                       Note:
T does not include nearby
population threat score; it is
added to the above calculated
value
         PA Guidance, section 3.5.4
                                      OH* 14
Soil Exposure Pathway
page 6-10
                                               4/94

-------
                                 SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY SCORESHEET
   Do any people live on 0' within 200 It o' areas of Suspected contamination?
   Do any people anend school or daycare on or within 200 It ol areas
      ol suspected contamination?                                   •
   Is the facility active?  Yes	  No	   II yes. estimate the number ol workers:
                            Yes .

                            Yes
No

No
LIKELIHOOD OF EXPOSURE
1.  SUSPECTED CONTAMINATION: Surlicial contamination can generally be assumed.
   and a score o< 550 assigned.  Assign zero only il the absence ol surficial
   contamination can be confidently demonstrated.                         LE -
RESIDENT POPULATION THREAT TARGETS
2.  RESIDENT POPULATION: Determine the number of people occupying residences
   or attending school or daycare on or within 200 feet of areas of suspected
   contamination (see Soil Exposure Pathway Criteria List, page 18).
                                                  	people x 10  -

3.  RESIDENT INDIVIDUAL: If you have identified a resident population (factor 21,
   assign a score of 50; otherwise, assign a score of 0.

4.  WORKERS: Use the following table to assign a score based on the total number of
   workers at the facility and nearoy facilities with suspected contamination:
Number ef Woi-tan
0
1 to 100
101 to 1,000
> 1 .000
5eorw
0
5
10
15
5.  TERRESTRIAL SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS:  Use PA Table 7 to assign a value
   for each terrestrial sensitive environment on an area of suspected
   contamination:
r«*r**l/)W ,$«*U/D'W £nvtn>nm**if Typ*
VtJts.



                                                                  Sum -
6. RESOURCES
                                                                   T  -
WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
RESIDENT POPULATION THREAT SCORE:
NEARBY POPULATION THREAT SCORE:
SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY SCORE:
Resident Population Threat  - Nearby Population Threat
LE  X T X  WC
                                                       82.500.
                        C0m4m//i«0on
                       	JllC.U	
                         Ul. to. t. • a
7.
Assign the
waste characteristics score calculated on page 4.
WC -
noa. a. • m
                                                 A-37
                              So// Exposure Pathway
                                             page 6-11

-------
                             SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
                       CASE STUDY: ABC VACUUM SERVICE

                             SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY

OBJECTIVE

Using background information from file searches, site reconnaissance notes, and maps, com-
plete the Soil Exposure Pathway portion of the PA scoresheets.

METHOD

      1. Review the general soil exposure pathway information summary (provided below),
         existing source information, and the maps included with the exercise.

      2. Read the instructions for the soil exposure pathway criteria list and complete the
         "Resident Population" evaluation. Determine whether you can identify a resident
         population. Summarize the rationale for this decision in the space provided.

      3. Using the existing site information and the scoresheet instructions, complete all
         portions of the soil exposure pathway scoresheet.  PA Table 7, Soil Exposure
         Pathway Terrestrial Sensitive Environment Values, should be used to determine
         values for terrestrial sensitive environments, if applicable.  Remember to evaluate
         the resident individual factor.

      4. Calculate and record the soil exposure pathway score.


Soil Exposure Pathway:

      • Nineteen residents live within 200 feet of the site.

      • No schools or daycare facilities are within 200 feet of the site.

      • The site is inactive; therefore, no workers are present onsite.

      • Ten people are employed at the crayfish ponds.

      • One report indicated that the warehouse complex employed 65 people.
Soil Exposure Pathway                                                              4/94
page 6-12

-------
ABC Vacuum Service
                          Warehouse
                                            Shed on
                                   :;: Standing ;:\  top of
                                   ;i; rainwater :V\ mixing
                                             tanks
                     Drainage ditches

                     Drainage direction
                                                Warehouse complex road
                                                 Not to Scale

-------
                 ABC Vacuum Service
                                                   Residential
                                                     Area
  \15'
Soil Exposure Pathway
page 6-14

-------
                          SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
Areas of surficial contamination can generally be assumed. This "Criteria List" helps guide the process
of developing a hypothesis concerning the exposure of specific targets to a hazardous substance at
the site.  Use the "Resident Population" section to evaluate site and source conditions that may help
identify targets  likely to  be  exposed to a  hazardous  substance.   The  check-boxes  record  your
professional judgment.  Answers to all of the  listed questions may not be available  during the  PA.
Also, the list is not all-inclusive; if other criteria help shape your  hypothesis, list them at the bottom
of the page or attach an additional page.

Check the boxes to indicate a "yes," "no," or "unknown" answer to each question.
                                                                    Soil Exposure Pathway
                                            A-34                               page 6-15

-------
                                                                                                                     18
                                SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
              SUSPECTED CONTAMINATION
                                                                        RESIDENT POPULA TION
                                                         Y  N
                                                         e  o
      Sufficial contamination can generally be assumed.
O D  3  Is any residence, school, or daycare facility on
          or within 200 feet  of an area of suspected
          contamination?

O D  LJ  Is any residence, school, or daycare facility
          located on adjacent land previously owned or
          leased by the site owner/operator?

D D  D  Is there e migration route that might spread
          hazardous substances near residences,
          schools, or daycare facilities?

D D  D  Have onsite or adjacent residents or students
          reported adverse health effects, exclusive of
          apparent drinking water or air contamination
          problems?

DOG  Does any neighboring property warrant
          sampling?
                                                         D D
                                                         D 0
          Other criteria?
          RESIDENT POPULATION IDENTIFIED?
  Summarize the rationale for Resident Population (attach an additional page if necessary):
Soil Exposure Pathway
page 6-16
                                                     A-35

-------
                              SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY SCORESHEET
Pathway Characteristics

Answer the questions at the top of the page.  Identify people who may be exposed to a hazardous substance
because they work at the facility, or  reside or attend school or daycare on or within 200 feet of an area of
suspected contamination.  If the site is active, estimate  the number of full and  part-time workers.  Note that
evaluation of targets is based on current site conditions.

Likelihood of Exposure (LEI

1. Suspected Contamination: Areas of surficial contamination are present at most sites, and a score of 550 can
generally be assigned as a default measure. Assign zero,  which effectively eliminates the pathway from further
consideration, only if there is no surficial contamination; reliable analytical data are generally necessary to make
this determination.

Resident  Population Threat Targets IT)

2. Resident Population correspondsto "primary targets" for the migration pathways. Use professional judgment
guided by the Soil Exposure Pathway  Criteria List (page 18) to determine if there are people living or attending
school or daycare on or within 200 feet of areas of suspected contamination.  Record the number of people
identified as resident population and multiply  by 10 to determine the Resident Population factor score.

3. Resident Individual: Assign 50 if  you have identified a resident population;  otherwise, assign zero.

4. Workers: Estimate the number of full and part-time workers at this facility and  adjacent facilities where
contamination is also suspected.  Assign a score for the Workers factor from the table.

5. Terrestrial Sensitive Environments: In the table provided, list each terrestrial sensitive environment located
on an area of suspected contamination.  Use PA Table 7 (page 20) to assign a value for each. Sum the values
and assign the total as the factor score.

6. Resources: A score of 5 can generally be assigned as a default measure. Assign zero only if there is no land
resource use on an area of suspected contamination.

Sum the target scores.

Waste Characteristics (WC1

7. Enter the WC score determined on page 4.

Resident Population Threat Score: Multiply  the  scores for LE, T, and WC. Divide  the product by  82,500.
Round the result to the nearest integer. If the result is  greater  than  100, assign 100.

Nearby Population Threat Score:  Do not evaluate this threat if you gave a zero score to Likelihood of Exposure.
Otherwise, assign a score based on the population within a 1 -mile radius (use the same 1 -mile radius population
you evaluate for air pathway population targets):

                      Population Within One Mile        Nearby Population Threat Score
                             < 10,000                               1
                           10,000  to 50,000                          2
                             > 50,000                                4

 Soil Exposure Pathway Score:  Sum  the Resident Population Threat score and the Nearby  Population Threat
 score, subject to a maximum of  100.
                                                                                   So/7 Exposure Pathway
                                                A-36                                           Pfl9e 8'17

-------
                                     SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY SCORESHEET
flOlvriy CA*/»cf«rbrfe«
Do any people live on or within 200 ft ol areas ol suspected contamination?
Do any people anend school or daycare on or within 200 ft ol areas
of suspected contamination?
Is the facility active? Yes No If yes, estimate the number of workers:
Yes 	
Yes 	
No 	
No 	
LIKELIHOOD OF EXPOSURE
1.
SUSPECTED CONTAMINATION: Surlicial contamination can generally be
and a score of 550 assigned. Assign zero only if the absence of surficial
contamination can be confidently demonstrated.
assumed.
LE -
Suip*C1*d
Conf tminttion

     RESIDENT POPULATION THREAT TARGETS
     2.  RESIDENT POPULATION:  Determine the number of people occupying residences
        or attending school or daycare on or within 200 feet of areas of suspected
        contamination (see Soil Exposure Pathway Criteria List, page 18).
                                                     	people  x  10 -

     3.  RESIDENT INDIVIDUAL: If you have identified a resident population (factor 2),
        assign a score of 50; otherwise, assign a  score of 0.

     4.  WORKERS:  Use the following table to assign a score based on the total number of
        workers at the faciliry and nearby facilities with suspected contamination:
Numbtf of Wort in
0
1 to 100
101 to 1.000
> 1 .000
Seor*
0
5
10
15
     S.  TERRESTRIAL SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS: Use PA Table 7 to assign a value
        for each terrestrial sensitive environment on an area of suspected
        contamination:
r«r»jr/TW 5«*u/o'yv £nvi>ojvn«m Typ*


VtJu*
	

                                                                    Sum
     6.  RESOURCES
                                                                      T -
     WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
     RESIDENT POPULATION THREAT SCORE:
     NEARBY POPULATION THREAT SCORE:
     SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY SCORE:
     Resident Population Threat  -t- Nearby Population Threat
  LE X T  X  WC
                                                          82,500.
                           III. iu. ». • a
7.
Assign the waste characteristics score calculated on page 4.
WC -
iioa. aa. - m
So// Exposure Pathway
page 6-18
A-37

-------
   PA TABLE 7: SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
TERRESTRIAL SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENT VALUES
Ttrrtstritl Stnsitlv* Environment ' Assigned Vtlui
Terrestrial critical habitat tor Federally designated endangered or threatened species
National Pare.
Designated federal Wilderness Area
National Monument
Terrestrial naoitat known to be used by Federally designated or oroposed threatened or endangered species
National Preserve (terrestrial)
National or State terrestrial Wildlife Refuge
Feoerai lano designated for protection of natural ecosystems
Administratively proposed Federal Wilderness Area
Terrestrial a:eas utilized by large or dense aggregations of animals (vertebrate species) for breeding
Terrestrial haoitat used by State designated endangered or threatened species
Terrestrial haoitat used by species under review for Federal designated endangered or threatened status
State iands Designated for wildlife or game management
State Designated Natural Areas
Particular areas, relatively small in size, important to maintenance of unique biotic communities
100
75
50
25
                                            Soil Exposure Pathway
                A'39                                    page 6-19

-------
                          Section  7:
                        Air Pathway
  Threat
Potential aourcee
of a retoaee to air
          Fire
     Bum operation (odore,
     JMM, pwticuMM)
                                                               Contaminant* may
                                                               aettfe on buldinga or
                                                                Mttto onto aofe

Swuitiv* Environment
 («.g-, twbtat. pvfc, or
                              Mine tailings
                                  pile
                                             DryanddtMty
                                           condiUorw may
                                            parttcutate* to ba
                                              blown offttta
      Waste water
        lagoon       **•> "•!••••
                 vapon/gaaea tnat ara
                  datacted by nearby
                  raaldanta/«vorkar«
             Contaminated
                 soils

-------
                                          AIR PATHWAY
                ThTMt
              PotentW •oufcst
              oftnliMitoilr
                       Fir*
                  Bum operation (odoni,
                    WastBwatef
                      lagoon
                                          Air Pathway
                                                                          Continiinmts may
                                                                         Mttto on budding* or
                                                                           Mtt* onto »oifc
                                                              . hat**. p*V or
                                                         Dry«nddu*y
                                                      condlbon* may CMJM
                                                        pwticuMM to b«
                                                         blown oflW*
   ItayralMM
v«pora/gMM that ire
 detected by nwrty
 midcnta/worlw*
Contaminated
   •ote
                                                                                      OH*1
                                  Air Pathway Evaluation
                    Waste
                Characteristics
            Likelihood
           of Exposure
                                                                       Human
                                                                     Population
                                                                       Targets
                                                                      Sensitive
                                                                    Environment
                                                                       Targets
           PA Guidance, section 3.6
                                                        OH* 2
AirPalhway
page 7-2
                                                                 4/94

-------
                                 • AIR PATHWAY •
                   Site Assessment Questions 2 and 3 for Air
               2.  What is the likelihood that hazardous substances are being
                  released to air and can be detected through sampling?
               3.  Who and what are likely to be affected?
         PA Guidance, sections 3.6.1 and 3.6.2                                   OH
                              Likelihood of Release

                Evaluated differently than other migration pathways
                Based on likelihood of detecting airborne hazardous substances
                during SI sampling
                Scored on "suspected release" or "no suspected release"
                Determined using the Criteria List for Suspected Release to Air
                Pathway (appendix A, page A-41)
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.1                                           OH • 4
V	.

4/94                                                                      AlrPtihway
                                                                            page 7-3

-------
                                          AIR PATHWAY  CRITERIA LIST
                     SUSPECTED RELEASE
                                                                PRIMARY TARGETS
    Y
    e
    s
    D D  Q  Are odors currently reported?
    D a
    D D  C
    CDC
    D D
    C D
Has release of a hazardous substance lo the air
been directly observed?

Are there reports ol adverse health effects
(e.g., headaches, nausea, dizziness) potentially
resulting from migration of hazardous
substances through the air?

Does analytical or circumstantial evidence
suggest a release to the air?

Other criteria?
If you suspect a release to air, evaluate all populations and
sensitive environments within 1/4 mile (including those
onsite) as primary targets.
              SUSPECTED RELEASE?
    Summarize the rationale for Suspected Release (attach an additional page il necessary):
Air Pathway
page 7-4
                                                        A-41

-------
                                    AIR PATHWAY
                                     Air Targets

               • People living, going to school, or working within 4 miles of site
               • Sensitive environments (terrestrial and aquatic) within % mile
               • Resources
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2
             OH*S
                                     Air Targets:
                            Target Distance Categories
                                                          1
                                                          2
                                                          3
-  % mile
-  V* mile
-  1 mile
- 2 miles
- 3 miles
- 4 miles
                           (Not to scale)
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2
             OH-6
4/94
               Air Pathway
                  page 7-5

-------
                                   AIR PATHWAY
                           Human Population Targets

            Residential populations
               • Identify population onsite and in each of the six distance
                categories
               • Can use data bases or housecounts depending on distance from
                site

            Worker and student populations
               • Identify those within % mile of site
               • Use readily available information
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2, pages 131 and 132                            OH • 7
V
                           Human Population Targets
                                   Data Bases

                Automated data bases based on U.S. Census population are very
                useful
                Graphical Exposure Modeling System (GEMS)
                Other population data base resources:
                - National Planning Data Corporation (NPDC)
                - Local city/county planning offices
                - Topographically Integrated Geographic Encoding and
                  Referencing (TIGER)
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2                                           OH • 8
Air Pathway                                                                      4/94
page 7-6

-------
                                  • AIR PATHWAY
                                     Data Bases
            Limitations of automated
            population data bases:
               • "Census tracts" based on
                 population density
                 (smaller in urban areas; larger in
                 rural areas)
               • Population  is assigned to
                 centroid of tract
               • Result: underestimation or
                 overestimation of population for
                 small, close-in, distance
                 categories (% mile, Ya mile)
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2, page 131
 OH* 9
                                    Data Bases
            Solution:
                Verify close-in population with house counts from topographic
                maps, aerial photos, reconnaissance windshield survey, or
                combination of all three
                Generally, automated population data bases are sufficiently
                accurate beyond *A mile
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2, page 132
OH* 10
4/94
   AlrPtthway
     page 7-7

-------
                                    AIR PATHWAY
                             Human Population Targets

             Nearest individual
                • Defined as the closest person to any source at the site
                • Indicates the magnitude of threat to the person who is most likely
                 to be exposed
                • Represented by nearest regularly occupied building
                • Distance to nearest individual is noted on the pathway
                 characteristics box of the air pathway scoresheet
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2, page 137
OH* 11
                         Sensitive Environment Targets
        Identify all sensitive environments
        either onsite, within % mile of the
        site, or within 1/& mile of the site
        Include terrestrial and aquatic
        environments
        PA table 5 (appendix A, page A-31)
        lists qualifying sensitive
        environments
        Wetlands are scored on acreage
        totals within each distance ring
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2, pages 132-134
OH* 12
Air Pathway
page 7-8
         4/94

-------
                                   AIR PATHWAY •
                         Primary and Secondary Targets

                All populations and sensitive environments out to and including
                the %-mile distance category are considered primary targets
                Must have suspected release to identify primary targets
                All targets beyond 1/4 mile are considered secondary targets
                Secondary target population values are assigned using PA table 8
                (appendix A, page A-45)
         PA Guidance, section 3.6.2, pages 134-136                               OH • 13
V
      Notes:
4/94                                                                       AirPrttway
                                                                             page 7-9

-------
                                   PA TABLE 8:  VALUES FOR SECONDARY AIR TARGET POPULATIONS
Dlsttnct
from Sit»
Onaite
>0 to X. mile
> X. to X mil.
> H lo I mile
> 1 to 2 rrwlef
> 2 lo 3 milai
>3 lo 4 mil m
Population







Nearest Individual •=
Nearest
Individual
(choose
highest)
20
20
2
\
0
0
0

Population Within Distance Category
1
i»
10
1
1
0
0
0
0
o
11
lo
30
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
31
la
too
S
1
1
0
0
0
0
tot
to
3OO
is
4
i
i
0
0
0
3O1
lo
1.OOO
52
13
3
1
1
1
0
1.001
lo
3.OOO
163
41
9
3
1
1
1
3.001
lo
10.OOO
521
130
28
8
3
1
1
10.OO1
If
3O.OOO
1.633
408
88
26
8
4
2
30.001
to
1OO.OOO
6.214
1.303
282
83
27
12
7
1 0O.OO1
to
300.000
18.325
4.081
882
2B1
83
38
23
3OO.OO 1
t*
I.OOO.OOO
52.136
13.034
2.815
834
268
120
73
Orfmtof
thflt
I.OOO.OOO
163.248
4O.811
8.815
2.812
833
378
229
Score -
Poputotiot
VtliM








>
en
                 PA TABLE 9:  AIR PATHWAY VALUES
                       FOR WETLAND AREA
We tland Area A sslgrted Value
Le«i than 1 acre
1 lo SO «crei
Giantai than 50 lo 1OO acrai
Create' lhan 1OO to ISO aciai
Graalar lhan 150 to 2OO acfea
Creator lhan 2OO lo 30O scre«
Gi.aler thin 3OO lo 4OO aciaa
Greater lhan 4OO lo 5OO acial
Greater lhan 5OO acre*
0
25
75
125
175
250
350
450
5OO
  PA TABLE 10: DISTANCE WEIGHTS AND CALCULATIONS
FOR AIR PATHWAY SECONDARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS
Distance
Oniito
0- 1 M nii
l/4-1/2mi
Distance
Weight
0.10
0.025
O.OOS4
Sensitive Environment Type and Value
(from PA Tfbb S or 91
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Total Environments Score —
Product











-------



\
Values for Secondary Target Populations
Distance
from Site
Onsite
0 to % mile
>% mile to V
>Vs mile to 1
>1 to 2 miles
>2 to 3 miles
>3 to 4 miles
Population Range:
Air Ground Water (nonkarst) I
(PA table 8) (PA table 2a) \
163 —
41 163
i mile 9 101
mile 3 52
1 29
1 21
1 13
1,001 to 3,000 OH • 14




•


)

                            Likelihood of Release
                  No suspected release vs. suspected release
                              • Primary targets
                              O Secondary targets
                                                                   OH* 15
4/94
Air Pathway
  page 7-11

-------
                                             AIR PATHWAY SCORESHEET
               Do you suspect a release Isee Air Patnway Criteria list, page 21)?
               Distance to the nearest individual:
                               Yes	  No
     LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
      1.  SUSPECTED RELEASE:  II YOU susoect a release to air Isee page 211. assign a
         score ol 550.  Use only column A (or this patfiway.

      2.  NO SUSPECTED RELEASE: If you do not susoect a release to air. assign a
         score ol 500.  Use only column 8 lor this pathway.
                                                                              LR -
     TARGETS
     3.  PRIMARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number ol people subject
         to exposure Irom a suspected release ol hazardous substances to the air.
                                                              	people x  10

     4.  SECONDARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number ol people not
         suspected to be exposed to a release to air, ana assign the total population
         score using PA Table 8.

     5.  NEAREST INDIVIDUAL: If you have identified any Primary Target Population
         for the an pathway, assign a score of 50: otnerwise, assign tne Nearest
         Inoividual score from PA Table 8.

     6.  PRIMARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS: Sum the sensitive environment values
         (PA Table 5) and wetland acreage values (PA Table  91 for environments subject
         to exposure from a suspected release to the air.
                                           Typ*
                                                                              Sum  -
      7.  SECONDARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS: Use PA Table  10 to determine
         tne score tor secondary sensitive environments.

      8.  RESOURCES
                                                                                T -
     WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
      9.  A.  If you have identified any Primary Target lor the air pathway, assign the waste
            characteristics score calculated on page <. or a score of 32. whichever is
            GREATER; do not evaluate part B of this factor.
         B.  II you nave NOT identified any Primary Target for the air pathway, assign the
            waste characteristics score calculated on page *.
                                                                              WC -
      AIR PATHWAY SCORE:
LR  x  T  x  WC
    82.500
Air Pathway
page 7-12
                                                           A-43

-------
                                  AIR PATHWAY •
                       CASE STUDY: ABC VACUUM SERVICE
                                   AIR PATHWAY
OBJECTIVE
Using background information from file searches, site reconnaissance notes, and site maps,
complete the Air Pathway portion of the PA scoresheets.

METHOD

      1.  Review the existing site information, site reconnaissance notes, population data
         base information, and map included with the exercise.

      2.  Read the instructions for the air pathway criteria list and complete the "Suspected
         Release" evaluation. Determine whether you can hypothesize a suspected release.
         Summarize the rationale for this decision in the space provided.

      3.  Using the existing site information and the scoresheet instructions, complete all
         portions of the air pathway scoresheet. PA Table 8, Values for Secondary Air Target
         Populations; PA Table 9, Air Pathway Values for Wetland Area; and PA Table 10,
         Distance Weights and Calculations for Air Pathway Secondary Sensitive
         Environments should be used to evaluate sensitive environments and secondary
         targets.  Remember to evaluate the nearest individual factor.
      4.  Calculate and record the air pathway score.

Air Pathway: GEMS Population Data for ABC Vacuum Service
North Latitude: 30° 30' 18" West Longitude: 91° 19' 16"   Total Population: 6,489
Record
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
Population
0
0
1096
1254
1733
2406
House
0
0
320
330
456
710
Distance
kilometers
0.40
0.81
1.60
3.20
4.80
6.40
miles
0.25
0.50
1
2
3
4
Sector
1
1
1
1
1
1
4/94
Mr Pathway
  page 7-13

-------
"S =:
to "
! ABC Vacuum Service
                                          Oxidation :•:
                                 Debris
                                    Concrete
                                     pads
                                   Warehouse
                          Septic
                          tank Q
                                                        Private well

                                                        Property boundary
                                  Rubbish
                                   pile
                                             Not to Scale

-------
                                AIR PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
This "Criteria List" helps guide the process of developing a hypothesis as to whether a release to the
air is likely to be detected.  The check-boxes record your professional judgment. Answers to all of the
listed questions may not be available during the PA.  Also, the list is not all-inclusive;  if other criteria
help shape your hypothesis, list them at the bottom  of the page or attach an additional page.

The "Suspected Release" section identifies several conditions that could  provide insight as to whether
a release from the site is  likely to be  detected.  If  a release is suspected, primary targets are any
residents,  workers, students,  and sensitive environments  on  or within '/« mile  of the site.

Check the boxes to indicate a "yes," "no," or "unknown"  answer to each question.  If you check the
"Suspected Release" box as "yes," make sure you assign a Likelihood of Release value of 550 for the
pathway.
                                                                                 Air Pathway
                                            A-40                                  page 7-15

-------
                                                                                                                         21
                                          AIR  PATHWAY CRITERIA LIST
                    SUSPECTED RELEASE
                                                                PRIMARY TARGETS
    Y  N  U
    eon
    s     k
    c  D  a

    C  D  u
    C  2  C
    G  D  IT
Are odors currently reported?

Has release of a hazardous substance to the air
been directly observed?

Are there reports of adverse health effects
(e.g., headaches, nausea, dizziness) potentially
resulting from migration of hazardous
substances through the air?

Does analytical or circumstantial evidence
suggest a release to the air?

Other criteria?
If you suspect a release to air, evaluate all populations and
sensitive environments within  1/4 mile (including those
onsite) as primary targets.
              SUSPECTED RELEASE?
    Summarize the rationale for Suspected Release (attach an additional page if necessary):
Air Pathway
page 7-16
                                          A-41

-------
                                         AIR PATHWAY SCORESHEET

Pathway Characteristics
Answer the questions at the top of the page. Refer to the Air Pathway Criteria List  (page  21) to hypothesize whether
you suspect that a hazardous substance release to the air could  be delected.  Due to dispersion, releases to air are not
as persistent  as releases to water migration pathways and are much more difficult to detect. Develop  your hypothesis
concerning the release of hazardous substances to air based on "real time" considerations.  Record the distance (in feetl
from any source to the nearest regularly occupied building.

Likelihood of  Release (LR)

1. Suspected Release  Hypothesize based on professional judgment guided by trie Air  Pathway  Criteria Lisi (page  21).
If you suspect a release to air, use only Column A for this pathway and do  not evaluate factor 2.

2. No Suspected Release:  If you do not suspect a release, enter 500 and use only Column B for this pathway.

Targets (T)

3. Primary Target Population: Evaluate populations subject to exposure from release  of a hazardous substance from the
site.  If you  suspect a release, the resident, student, and worker  populations on and  within  '/.  mile of the sue are
considered primary target population.  II only the number of residences is  known, use the average county residents per
household (rounded up to  the next integer) to determine  the population.  In the space provided, enter this population.
Multiply the population  by 10 to determine the Primary Target Population score.  Note that if you Oo not suspect a release.
there  can be  no primary target population.

4. Secondary Target Population: Evaluate populations in distance categories not suspected to be subject to exposure from
release of a hazardous substance from the site.  If you suspect a release,  residents, students, and workers in the '/• • to
4-mile distance categories are secondary target population.  If you do not  suspect a release, all residents, students, and
workers onsite and within 4 miles are considered secondary target population.

Use PA Table 8 (page 23).  Enter the population in each secondary target population distance category, circle the assigned
value, and record it on the far-right side of the table.  Sum the  far-right  column and enter the  total as the Secondary
Target Population factor score.

5. Nearest Individual represents the threat posed to the person most likely to be  exposed to a  hazardous substance release
from the site. If you have identified a primary target population, enter 50.  Otherwise, assign the score from PA Table
8  (page 23)  for the closest distance category in which you have identified a secondary target population.

6. Primary Sensitive  Environments:  If a release is suspected, all  sensitive environments  on or within '/« mile  of the sue
are considered primary targets. List them  and assign values for  sensitive  environment  type (from PA Table 5, page 16)
and/or wetland acreage (from PA Table 9, page 23).  Sum the values and enter the  total as the factor score.

7. Secondary Sensitive Environments: If  a release  is suspected, sensitive  environments in  the '/«• to '/7-mile distance
category are  secondary targets; greater distances need not be evaluated because distance  weighting greatly diminishes
the impact on site score.  If you do not suspect a release, all  sensitive environments on and within '/> mile of the site are
considered secondary targets. List each secondary  sensitive environment on  PA Table  10  (page 23) and assign a value
to each using PA Tables B and 9.  Multiply  each value by the  indicated distance weight  end  record the product in the far-
right column.  Sum the products and  enter the total as the factor score.

8. Resources: A score  of 5 can generally be assigned as a default measure.  Assign zero only if there is no land resource
use within  V> mile.

Sum the target scores  in Column A (Suspected Release)  or Column B (No Suspected Release).

Waste Characteristics (WCI

9.Waste Characteristics:  Score is assigned from page 4. However, if  you have identified any primary target for the air
pathway, assign either the score calculated  on page 4 or a score of 32, whichever is greater.

Air Pathway  Score:  Multiply the scores for LR, T, end WC. Divide the product by 82.500.  Round  the result to the
nearest integer.  If the  result is greater than 100, assign 100.


                                                                                                Air Pathway
                                                     A-42                                         page  7-17

-------
                                            AIR PATHWAY SCORESHEET
               Do you suspect a release Isee Air Patrtway Criteria Lisi. page 211?
               Outance to (he nearest individual:
     LIKELIHOOD OF RELEASE
      I.  SUSPECTED RELEASE: II you suspect a release to air Isee page 211. assign a
         score of 550. Use only column A (or this pathway.

      2.  NO SUSPECTED RELEASE: If you do not suspect a release to air. assign a
         score ol 500. Use only column 8 for this pathway.
      TARGETS
      3.  PRIMARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number of people subject
         to exposure from a suspected release of hazardous substances to the air.
                                                             	people x 10

      4.  SECONDARY TARGET POPULATION:  Determine the number of people not
         suspected to be exposed to a release to air. and assign the total population
         score using  PA Table 8.

      5.  NEAREST INDIVIDUAL: If you have identified any Primary Target Population
         lor the air pathway, assign a score of 50; otherwise, assign the Nearest
         Individual score from PA Table 8.

      6.  PRIMARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS: Sum the sensitive environment values
         IPA Table 51 and wetland acreage values IPA Table  91 for environments subject
         to exposure from a suspected release to the  air.
      7   SECONDARY SENSITIVE ENVIRONMENTS: Use PA Table 10 to determine
         the score for secondary sensitive environments.

      8.  RESOURCES
     WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
      9.  A.  If you have identified any Primary Target for the air pathway, assign the waste
            characteristics score calculated on page 4. or a score ol 32, whichever is
            GREATER; do not evaluate pan B of this factor.

         B.  If you nave NOT identified any Primary Target for the air pathway, assign the
            waste characteristics score calculated on page *.
                                                                            WC  -
     AIR PATHWAY SCORE:
                                                             LR x  T  x WC
                                                                  82.500
Air Pathway
page 7-18
                                                         A-43

-------
                                   PA TABLE 8: VALUES FOR SECONDARY AIR TARGET POPULATIONS
Distance
from Site
Onaile
>0 lo X mila
> V. 10 H mil*
> H lo 1 mils
> 1 lo 2 n«le«
> 1 lo 3 nrulei
> 3 lo 4 miloi
Population







Nearest Individual «=
Nearest
Individual
(choose
highest!
20
20
2
1
O
0
O

Population Within Distinct Category
1
1C
to
1
. 1
0
0
O
0
O
n
lo
30
2
1
0
0
O
0
0
31
lo
100
5
I
1
0
O
0
0
101
It
300
10
4
1
1
0
0
0
301
lo
1.OOO
52
13
3
1
1
0
1.001
to
3.OOO
183
41
9
3
1
1
1
3.OOI
lo
10.OOO
521
130
28
8
3
1
1
10.001
lo
3O.OOO
1.A33
4O8
88
20
8
4
2
3O.OO1
Im
1OO.OOO
6,214
1.303
282
83
27
12
7
100.001
if
3OO.OOO
18.325
4.081
882
201
83
38
23
300.001
to
1. OOO.OOO
62.138
13.034
2.815
834
2S6
120
73
Qr*mtor
CAM
1. OOO.OOO
183.246
40,811
8.815
2.012
833
370
229
Score —
Population
Vtlut








t*.
on
 1*
 CD Q)
 
-------
             Section 8:
Completing the PA Investigation
     Data
   Summary
     Form
    Narrative
    Report
Complete PA Package
     PA
  Scoresheets

-------
                      COMPLETING THE PA INVESTIGATION
                       Completing the PA Investigation
                                  Site Scoring
                                     and
                                   Summary
                                      T
                                    Reporting
                                  Requirements
                                    Review
                                      PA
                                    Package
                                                                     OH*1
                                Site Score

                      Combines scores for all four pathways
                      Uses a root-mean-square formula:
                 Site Score =
S  2 +S
 QW     t
                                                     +S
                      Calculate score using matrix provided in the PA
                      scoresheet (appendix A, site score calculation,
                      page A-47)
        PA Guidance, section 3.7
                                 OH* 2
Competing 0M A4 Investigition
page 8-2

-------
                       COMPLETING THE PA INVESTIGATION
                                  Summary

                Provides a qualitative evaluation of relative risk of targets
                exposed to hazardous substances from the site
                Cross-checks individual pathway scores
                Identifies affected targets
                Used as basis for site hypotheses
                Summary table and instructions are found in appendix A,
                pages A-46 and A-47
      PA Guidance, Section 3.7                                               OH • 3
V
         Notes:
4194                                                       Completing the RAInvgsttgitlon
                                                                            page 8-3

-------
                                   SITE SCORE CALCULATION
   In the column labeled S, record the Ground Water Pathway score, the Surface Water Pathway score,
   the  Soil Exposure Pathway score, and the Air Pathway score.  Square each pathway score and record
   the  result in the S2 column.  Sum the squared  pathway scores.  Divide the sum by 4,  and take the
   square root of the result to obtain the Site Score.
                                           SUMMARY
   Answer the summary questions, which ask for a qualitative evaluation of the relative risk of targets
   being exposed to a hazardous substance from the site.   You may find your responses to these
   questions a good cross-check  against the way you scored the individual pathways. For example, if
   you scored the ground water pathway  on the basis of no suspected release and secondary targets
   only, yet your response to question #1 is "yes," this presents  apparently conflicting conclusions that
   you need to reconsider and resolve.  Your answers to the questions on page 24 should be consistent
   with your evaluations elsewhere in the PA scoresheets package.
Completing the PA Investigation
page 8-4
                                              A-46

-------
                              SITE SCORE CALCULATION

GROUND WATER PATHWAY
SCORE (Sow):
SURFACE WATER PATHWAY
SCORE (S,J:
SOIL EXPOSURE PATHWAY
SCORE (S,):
AIR PATHWAY
SCORE (S.):
SITE SCORE:
A
S
.




I s^+s^+s^+s^
\ 4
S3





SUMMARY

1.



2.





3.


4.

Is there a high possibility of a threat to any nearby drinking water well(s) by migration of a
hazardous substance in ground water?
A. If yes, identify the well(s).
8. If yes, how many people are served bv the threatened well(s)?
Is there a high possibility of a threat to any of the following by hazardous substance
migration in surface water?
A. Drinking.water intake
B. Fishery
C. Sensitive environment (wetland, critical habitat, others)
0. If yes, identify the target(s).


Is there a high possibility of an area of surficial contamination within 200 feet of any
residence, school, or daycare facility?
If yes, identify the property(ies) and estimate the associated population(s).
Are there public health concerns at this site that are not addressed by PA scoring
considerations? If yes, explain:

i

YES

D




D
a
a


a


a
NO

a




a
a
a


a


a
                                        A-47
                                                              Completing the PA Investigation
                                                                                 page 8-5

-------
                       COMPLETING THE PA INVESTIGATION
                  Data
                Summary
                  Form
                 Narrative
                  Report
                   PA
               Scoresheets
         PA Guidance, section 4
                            Reporting Requirements
Complete PA Package
                  OH* 4
                            Reporting Requirements
                Potential hazardous waste site preliminary assessment form (PA
                Guidance, appendix D)


                Narrative report
                - May be a letter report or a stand-alone document
                - Factual statements must be keyed to a supporting reference
                - References not available to general public are attached to report
                - Must include latitude and longitude worksheet
                - Table 4-1 (pages 145-147) contains PA report outline
         PA Guidance, sections 4.1 and 4.2
                  OH* 6
Completing the PA Investigation
page 8-6
                          4/94

-------
                                         Table 4-1
                          PA Narrative Report, Outline of Contents
INTRODUCTION
    •  State that a PA was performed, name the agency or organization performing it, and
       state the authority under which it was conducted (i.e., CERCLA as amended by SARA,
       and EPA contract or cooperative agreement).  Include the site name, CERCLIS
       identification number, and location (street address, city, county, state).

    •  Briefly state the purpose of the PA (i.e., to assess the immediate or potential  threat
       wastes at the site pose to human health and the environment and to collect information
       to support a decision regarding the need for further action under CERCLA/SARA) and the
       scope of the investigation (e.g., research and review file information, comprehensive
       target survey, and an offsite or onsite reconnaissance).

SITE DESCRIPTION. OPERATIONAL HISTORY. AND WASTE CHARACTERISTICS

    •  State brief directions to the site.  Provide latitude/longitude coordinates.  Identify the
       type of site  (e.g., plating facility, chemical plant), whether it is active or inactive, and
       years of operation.  Describe its physical characteristics (e.g., dimensions, size,
       structures, buildings, borders,  drainage patterns), and setting (e.g., topography, local
       land uses).  Include a USGS 7.5-minute base map locating the site and showing a 1-mile
       radius.  On the map, identify the surface water drainage route; nearest well, intake, and
       residence; wetlands  and other sensitive environments.  Include a drafted site  sketch
       showing features on and around the site.

    •  Provide an operational  history  of the site.  Identify current and former owners and
       operators, and describe site  activities.  Identify and describe wastes generated,
       quantities, disposal  practices, and source areas.  Indicate source areas on the sketch.
       Describe any removals, whether conducted by facility operators or regulatory authorities.

    •  Describe past regulatory activities including permits, violations, and inspections by local,
       state, or Federal authorities. Present available analytical data in a table and discuss.

PATHWAY AND ENVIRONMENTAL  HAZARD ASSESSMENT

    Ground Water

    •  Describe the local geologic and hydrogeologic setting (e.g., stratigraphy, formations,
       aquifers, karst features, depth and permeability to the shallowest aquifer).

    •  On the basis of the  site description, operational history, local geology and hydrogeology,
       and any available analytical data, state whether release of a hazardous substance from
       the site to ground water is suspected.  If analytical data are available, summarize them
       in a table.

    •  Discuss ground water use within a 4-mile radius.  Identify the nearest drinking water
       well and state the distance to  it.  Quantify drinking water populations served  by wells
       within 4 miles.  Differentiate between populations served by private wells and those
       served by  municipal wells; identify blended systems.  Identify drinking water wells
       suspected to be primary targets and quantify the populations associated  with each.
                                                                  Completing the PA Investigation
                                                                                       page 8-7

-------
                                     Table 4-1  (continued)
                            PA, Narrative Report, Outline of Contents
  PATHWAY AND ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD ASSESSMENT (continued)

      Surface Water

      •  Describe the local hydrologic setting, including site location with respect to floodplains,
         and the overland and downstream portions of the surface water migration path. State
         the distance from the site to the probable point of entry (PPE) to surface water. Identify
         the water bodies .within a 15-mile downstream distance, and state the length of reach
         and flow characteristics of each.  Include a drafted sketch of the surface water
         migration path.

      •  On the basis of the site description and operational history, local hydrology, and any
         available analytical data,  state whether release of a hazardous substance from the site to
         surface water is suspected.  If analytical data are available, summarize them in a table.

      •  Indicate whether surface  water  within a 15-mile downstream distance supplies drinking
         water.  Identify each drinking water intake and state the distance from the PPE to the
         nearest intake. Quantify  the drinking water population served by surface water and
         identify blended systems. Identify surface water intakes suspected to be primary targets
         and quantify the populations served by each.

      •  Indicate whether surface  water  along a 15-mile downstream distance supports fisheries.
         Identify each fishery and  state the distance from the PPE to the nearest fishery; identify
         the fishery with the lowest flow characteristics.  Identify fisheries suspected to be
         primary targets.

      •  Indicate whether sensitive environments are present in or adjacent to the surface water
         migration path (overland  and along a 15-mile downstream distance).  Identify each
         sensitive environment and state the distance from the PPE to the nearest; identify the
         sensitive environment with the lowest flow characteristics. Identify sensitive
         environments  suspected  to be primary targets.

      Soil  Exposure and Air

      •  Indicate the number of onsite workers and the number of people who live onsite or
         within 200 feet of areas  of known or suspected contamination. Identify schools and day
         care facilities onsite or within 200 feet of areas of known or suspected contamination,
         and state the number of  attendees.  Quantify the populations (residents, students, and
         workers) within 4 miles of the site; state the distance to the nearest regularly occupied
         onsite or offsite building.  Identify sensitive environments onsite and within 4  miles of
         the site.  Discuss the likelihood  of a hazardous substance being released to the air.  If
         analytical data are available, summarize them in a table.
Completing the PA Investigation
page 8-8

-------
                                   Table 4-1 (concluded)
                          PA Narrative Report, Outline of Contents
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

    •  Briefly summarize the major aspects of the site and its history that relate to the potential
       for releases of hazardous substances and the exposure of targets.  Identify principal
       pathways and targets of concern. Discuss additional qualitative considerations or
       unusual circumstances  that should be brought to the attention of Regional EPA site
       assessment personnel.

PHOTODOCUMENTATION LOG

    •  As an attachment, provide original photographs of the site and  pertinent site features
       (e.g., waste source areas, stained soil, stressed vegetation, drainage paths) taken during
       the site reconnaissance.  Provide a written description on the back of each photo, in
       captions, or in an accompanying text. Key each photo to its location on the site  sketch.

REFERENCES

    •  Provide a numbered list, in bibliographic citation format, of all references cited in  the PA
       report.

    •  Attach copies of references cited in  the PA report.  Include complete copies of site-
       specific references (e.g.,  USGS topographic quads, records of communication,  drinking
       water population apportionment and calculation worksheets, GEMS and other database
       printouts, waste handling records or shipping manifests).  Include only the title page and
       pertinent excerpts of general references (e.g., geologic reports, census reports, other
       publicly available documents).
                                                                    Completing the PA Investigation
                                                                                         page 8-9

-------
                     • COMPLETING THE PA INVESTIGATION  •
                               Reporting Requirements

              PA scoring
                 • PA scoresheets
                   - Must be included
                   - Provide national consistency in reporting
                   - Found in PA Guidance, appendix A
                   - Also available from EPA
                   - Regional variations may exist
                 • PA-Score
                   - Computer program developed by EPA
                   - Performs all factor value table look-ups and mathematical
                    calculations
                   - PA-print used to print scoresheets, references, and PA data
                    summary form
         PA Guidance, section 4.3                                            OH • 6
         PA Guidance, section 5.1
        Reviews

Chocking for internal consistency
   • Look at:
    - Criteria lists
    - Pathway characteristics boxes
    - Scoring columns "A" and "B"
    - PA tables 1-10
    - Summary questions
   • Use Table 5-1, Checklist for Internal Consistency
    (PA Guidance, pages 151-152)


                                          OH«7
Completing the PA Investigation
page 8-10
                                                  4/94

-------
                       COMPLETING THE PA INVESTIGATION
                                 Reviews

             Review of PA hypotheses

                • Ensure hypotheses are reasonable and well-founded
                • Evaluate responses on criteria lists for appropriate
                 conclusions
                • Resolve any differences of opinion
                • Avoid inappropriate NFRAP recommendations
        PA Guidance, section 5.2
                                        OH* 8
                                The Next Step...
                 Site
              Discovery
CERCLIS
Preliminary
Assessment
                                                              Site
                                                           Inspection
                                                              t  Yes
  PA
 Score
> 28.5?
                                                                  No
                                                            NFRAP
                                                          Recommen-
                                                             dation
                                                                      OH* 9
4/94
                           Completing the PA Investigation
                                            page 8-11

-------
APPENDIX A
  Fact Sheets

-------
                                                                          PB93-963341
                      United States
                      Environmental Protection
                      Agency
Office of
Solid Waste and
Emergency Response
Directive 9345.1-16FS
EPA540-F-93-038
September 1993
                      Integrating  Removal  and
                      Remedial  Site  Assessment
                      Investigations
  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
  Hazardous Srte Evaluation Division (5204GL
                    Quick Reference Fact Sheet
Increased efficiency and shorter response times are the primary objectives of integrating removal and remedial site
assessment investigations under the  Superfund Accelerated Cleanup Model (SACM).  This  is based  on  the
assumption that there is duplication of effort between the programs.  A critical element of SACM is a continuous
and integrated approach to assessing sites.  The concept of integrating removal and  remedial  site assessment
activities was introduced in Assessing Sites Under SACM—Interim Guidance (OSWER Publication 9203.1-051,
Vonme 1, Number 4, December 1992). This fact sheet examines areas of duplication and key differences between
the two types of investigations, and describes some approaches for integrating assessments. The primary audience
for this information is the site assessment community which includes EPA On-Scene Coordinators (OSCs) and Site
Assessment Managers (SAMs), their  counterparts in state or other federal agencies, and assessment contractors.
REMOVAL ASSESSMENTS AND
REMEDIAL SITE ASSESSMENTS

Figure 1 illustrates traditional assessment activities of
the removal and remedial programs prior to SACM.
Typically, when EPA is notified of a possible release
(under CERCLA Section 103), the removal program
determines whether there is a need for emergency
response by  EPA.    If  a  response  is  deemed
necessary,  an   OSC  and/or  a removal  program
contractor will visit the site. If circumstances allow,
a file and telephone investigation should be initiated
prior to the site visit.  The OSC may decide to take
samples  during this initial visit or  may postpone
sampling. EPA can initiate a removal action at any
point in the  assessment  process.   If  the  OSC
determines that the site does not warrant a removal
action,  he  may refer  the site  to remedial  site
assessment  or  the State for further evaluation, or
 recommend no further federal response action.

 The remedial site assessment process is similar to that
 of the  removal  program.  Once  a site has  been
 discovered and entered into the CERCLIS data  base,
 the SAM directs that  a preliminary assessment (PA)
 be performed  at the site.  The focus of PA data
 collection is the set of Hazard Ranking System (HRS)
  factors that can be obtained without sampling (e.g.,
  population within 1/4 mile). The PA includes a file
  and telephone investigation, as well as a site visit (the
  PA reconnaissance, or  "recon").  The  PA recon
  differs from  the typical removal site visit  because
  samples are not collected and observations are often
  made from the perimeter of the site (although some
  Regions prefer on-site PA recons).   From the PA
  information,  the SAM determines if a site inspection
  (SI) is needed (i.e., whether the site could score
  greater than  the 28.5 needed to qualify for inclusion
  on the National Priorities List (NPL)). The SI would
  include sufficient sampling and other information to
  allow the SAM to determine whether the score is
  above 28.5.   Even  in cases where SI data  are
  adequate for this  decision, it may be necessary  to
  conduct an expanded site  inspection (ESI) to obtain
  legally defensible documentation.

   In general, the  remedial site  assessment process is
   more structured  than the removal  assessment and
   operates on  a less intensive schedule. The remedial
   site assessment process  is  focused on collecting data
   for the HRS, while Removal  assessments are based
   on whether site conditions meet National Contingency
   Plan (NCP)  criteria for  a removal action.

-------
                 Figure 1:  Traditional Assessment Processes
                           REMOVAL  PROGRAM
                       Assess Whether Incident
                       Meets NCP Criteria (or a
                           Removal Action
YES
Prepare and Obtain Approval
  of Action Memorandum
  Initiate Removal
Action Site Actlvltes
                                  NO
                       Terminate PA or Refer to Remedial
                          Program or Other Authorities,
                                If Appropriate
                          REMEDIAL PROGRAM
                         Removal  Actions May Occur at any Stage

Discovery



CERCL1S

k


Prell
AflftOfl

, s tnspc (£ ^ Ie ') r r> k ESI (If necestary) r1 Hazard Ranking System (MRS) National Priorities List (NPL) ^ Remedial Investigation/ Feasibility Study (RI/FS) w Record of Decision (ROD) Remedial 1 Design/ Remedial | Action Site Evaluation Accomplished (SEA) (Site Screened Out of Process)


-------
INTEGRATING ASSESSMENT ACTIVITIES

While there are  differences  in  objectives between
removal   and   remedial  assessments  (i.e.,  NCP
removal  criteria  versus  HRS),  many  of the same
factors are important to both programs: the potential
for human exposure through drinking water, soils,
and   air   pollution;  and   threats   to   sensitive
environments such as wetlands.   Similarities in the
activities  required by both assessments—telephone
and  file  investigations,  site visits or  PA recons,
removal   or SI sampling  visits—suggest that  the
activities  can  be consolidated.   The  challenge  of
integrating assessments is to organize the activities to
enhance efficiency.

The basic goals of an integrated  assessment program
under SACM are:

   •   Eliminate duplication of effort.

   •   Expedite  the process.  At a minimum, avoid
      delays for time-critical removal actions or early
      actions (see Early Action and Long-Term Action
      Under  SACM— Interim   Guidance,  OSWER
      Publication 9203.1-051, Volume  1, Number 2,
      December 1992, for details on early and long-
      term actions).

   •  Minimize the  number of  site visits and other
      steps in the process.

   •  Collect only the data needed to  assess the site
      appropriately.

 The last  point  is critical  to enhancing efficiency since
 not  all sites need to be assessed in depth for both
 removal   and   remedial   purposes.     Integrating
 assessments does not mean simply adding together the
 elements of both assessments for all  sites—efficient
 decision  points  must  be incorporated  into  the
 integration process.  The elements deemed necessary
 for an integrated assessment depend on the particular
 needs of a specific site and could involve similar,
 additional,  or  slightly  different  activities  from
 traditional removal or remedial site assessments.

 Figure 2 shows an approach for integrating the two
 • assessments   and   indicates   ways   to  eliminate
  unnecessary  data collection.   The  most important
  features  of   the   approach   are   the   combined
  notification/site  discovery/screening  function;  the
  single  site visit  for  both programs;  phased  file
searches   as  appropriate;  and  integrated  sample
planning and inspection.   This approach is detailed
below.

Notification/Siie Discovery/Screening

This "one door" notification process is a combination
of  the  current  removal  and  remedial  program
notification/discovery.   All remedial and removal
program discovered sites are  screened  for possible
emergency  response.   The  screening  step would
determine whether there is time for a Hie search prior
to the initial site visit.

(Classic) Emergency

If an emergency is identified,  the response would be
implemented  immediately.    Emergency responses
require immediate sampling and removal actions and
allow little or  no  time  for  file or telephone
investigations prior to site activity.

File Search

The integrated file search includes all elements of the
 current  removal assessment  file  search.   All  file
 search elements should be thoroughly documented to
 serve the needs of both programs.  Table 1  lists data
 elements that are commonly a part of the file search.
 The timing of the file search relative to the initial site
 visit   would   be   determined   during   the
 notification/screening step.
           Table 1:  File Search and
            Telephone Investigation
         Elements Common to Both Programs
        Regulatory program file search (e.g., RCRA,
        water, state)
        Site access information and property
        ownership
        Site history,  industrial processes
        Substances used at site
        Past releases (substances, locations, impacts)
        Latitude and longitude
        Topographic maps
          Generally Removal Assessment Only
         Potentially responsible party (PRP) search
         Treatment technology review

-------
                                               Figure  2:  Integrated Assessment
                                                                                                      No Further Action
                    No Further Action
                                                        Sample (Optional)-
                          1
     Report
Received/Release
    Identified
Initial Screening
 lor Emergency
   Elglblllty
                                                                                      <28.S
    Review
Data/Oeclclon  on
 Further Action
                                                                                         Definitely
                                                                                                         May  be
                                                                                                          >28.S
                                                                                Do Removal
                                                                                               No
                                                                                                                    Si/Removal
                                                                                                                    Assessment
                                                                                                                  Sampling Report
                                                                                                             >28.S
                                                                                                                   Do  Removal

-------
Initial Field Investigation/PA Recon

The  integrated site visit  combines elements of both
the removal assessment field visit and the remedial
PA recon.   Because removal and remedial program
site visit activities are similar, only a small increase
in effort would be required to meet the needs of both
programs.   Documentation needs of remedial  site
assessment might require slight revision of removal
assessment procedures. For example, one might need
to document the distance to the nearest residence, in
addition to locating any  contaminated  residential
properties; for removal assessment needs, one might
need  to assess the extent of  contamination.   The
assessment  team  will   need   to  gain  site   access
approval for the site visit, in  contrast with current
remedial PA recons performed  from the perimeter in
some Regions.   Table 2 lists elements that are
commonly part of the screening site visit.

Sample (Optional1)

Integrated  assessment sampling should  follow the
current removal assessment approach,  except that
HRS data  needs should be considered  in selecting
sample  locations  and  laboratory  analyses.    The
emphasis, however, is on removal assessment needs.

Review Data/Decide Further Action

Both removal  and remedial programs would  jointly
recommend   a  course   of   action,  taking  into
consideration any  previous removal actions.  A site
might undergo either  a  continuation of the removal
assessment, a remedial site assessment PA,  or both
concurrently.  Alternatively, a time-critical removal
 action could be performed prior to deciding whether
 the  site should undergo a PA. Completing the PA
 might be expedited in order to determine early in the
 process   whether   remedial   site   assessment
 requirements should be included in sampling plans.
 When  planning  the site inspection, the Region may
 also want to  consider the effect of a  removal action
 on the HRS score (see The Revised Hazard Ranking
 System:   Evaluating Sites After  Waste  Removals,
 OSWER Publication 9345.1-03FS, October 1991).

 Complete the PA

 Collect any information needed for the remedial site
 assessment that was not part of the earlier file search,
 and calculate the  preliminary  HRS score.  For sites
 assigned  the SEA  (site evaluation accomplished)
Table  2:   Data  Elements of the  Site Visit
       Elements Common to Both Programs
      Current human exposure identification
      Sources identification, including locations,
      sizes, volumes
      Information on substances present
      Labels on drums and containers
      Containment evaluation
      Evidence of releases (e.g., stained soils)
      Locations of wells on site and in immediate
      vicinity
      Runoff channels or pathways
      Location of site or sources relative to surface
      waters
      Nearby wetlands identification
      Nearby land uses (e.g.,  residential, schools,
      parks, industrial)
      Distance measurements or estimates for wells,
      land uses (residences and schools), surface
      waters, and wetlands
      Public accessibility (e.g., site fence)
      Blowing soils and air contaminants
      Photodocumentation
      Site sketch
        Generally Removal Assessment Only
      Petroleum releases (eligible)
      Fire and explosion threat
      Urgency of need for response
      Response and treatment alternatives evaluation
      Greater emphasis on specific pathways (e.g.,
      direct contact)
      Sampling
      Generally Remedial Site Assessment Only
       Perimeter survey (in some Regions)
       Number of people within 200 feet
       Some sensitive environments (e.g., endangered
       species habitats)
       Review all pathways
designation, also complete the PA report. Depending
on circumstances and the Region's approach, the PA
report might be included as part of a comprehensive
PA/SI report for sites scoring above 28.5.  Table 3
lists typical data  elements of this activity. If after the
PA it is evident that a site is likely to qualify for the
NPL, the site would  be referred  to the Regional
Decision  Team  (RDT).    (See SACM  Regional
Decision    Teams—Interim    Guidance,    OSWER
 Publication  9203.1-051,  Volume  1,  Number 5,

-------
                     Table 3:  Data Elements Needed to Complete the PA
      Population within 1 and 4 miles
      All private and municipal wells within 4 miles
      Depth to ground  water (sometimes also collected for removal assessment)
      Local or regional geology and climate
      Distance to surface water measured (removal assessment only estimates distance)
      Fisheries along a 15-mile surface water migration pathway
      Sensitive environments along a 15-mile surface water migration pathway
      Size of wetlands
      Preliminary HRS score
December 1992, for details on the composition and
role of the RDT.)

Integrated Sampling Plan

This combines planning for  the current screening
level  SI (see  section  2.1  of  the  Guidance for
Performing Site Inspections Under CERCLA, OS WER
Directive  9345.1-05,  1992)  and   any   removal
sampling activities not already addressed by the initial
visit. When it appears that a remedial action will be
appropriate, and the site looks like a candidate for
NPL listing, a Remedial Project Manager (RPM)
should join the OSC and SAM in sample planning  to
incorporate the objectives of any potential long-term
actions at the site.   For  applicable sites,  this will
enhance  the  efficiency  of  progressing   from
assessment to  remediation,  or  starting a  remedial
investigation prior  to  NPL  proposal.   Likewise,
sample planning should anticipate the needs of any
possible engineering evaluation/cost analysis (EE/C A)
that might be needed for subsequent non-time-critical
removal actions.

Si/Removal Assessment Sampling

This is a single sampling event designed to meet the
needs  of both programs, where appropriate.  Along
with the site visit and the file search, integrating
sampling  would  improve  efficiency.    Table  4
describes differences  in emphasis between  removal
 and remedial site  assessment  sampling  approaches
 which need to be considered when developing a joint
 sampling plan.

 RDT Decisions

 The RDT determines the course of action  needed to
 address a site, based on the  outcome of the site
 assessment PA, Si/removal assessment, and any time-
 critical removal actions.  This can include proposing
to list the site on  the  NPL; conducting an early
action; starting the remedial investigation (RI) early;
or combining the RI with the data collection needed
for listing.

ESI/RI

One option open to the RDT is to start the RI as soon
as it is apparent that the  site will qualify for the NPL
(e.g., after a PA), even if further documentation is
needed  for NPL rulemaking.  The needs of NPL
listing and the  RI  can  be integrated into a single
sampling  plan to give  a headstart to a  long-term
action.

Flexibility in Approach

Figure  2  addresses  the most likely approaches for
screening site assessments; in fact, the approach will
vary  according to the site and other factors.  Time-
critical removal actions  can occur  at  any  time.
Enforcement,  community  relations,  and  remedial
planning  considerations can be  factored into  data
collection as needed at any point along the process.
 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS

 Methods of recording  or documenting  information
 vary between programs.  Documentation is a major
 consideration  for  both  programs,  but the  HRS
 requires a specific data set.  In order for a common
 data element to be  used by  both programs, HRS
 documentation needs to be addressed.

 Timing and duration of the activities  also need to be
 considered by Regional personnel who are setting up
 integrated   assessments.     One  critical   timing
 consideration  involves the  step "complete the PA."
 At some sites this can proceed on a routine schedule,
 but if a Region decides that sampling is  needed to

-------
                 Table 4:  Site Inspection/Removal Assessment Sampling
                                   Remedial Site Assessment Emphasis
     Attribution to the site
     Background samples
     Ground water samples
     Grab samples from residential soils
     Surface water sediment samples
     HRS factors related to surface water sample locations (e.g., floodplains, watershed area)
     Fewer samples  on average (10-30) than removal assessment
     Strategic sampling for HRS
     Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) usage (no separate funding for analytical services)
     Full screening organics and inorganics analyses
     Definitive analyses
     Documentation, including targets and receptors (e.g., maps, census data)
     Computing HRS scores
     Standardized reports                                         	
                                      Removal Assessment Emphasis
   •  Sampling from containers
   •  Physical characteristics of wastes
   •  Treatability and other engineering concerns
   •  On-site contaminated soils
   •  Composite and grid sampling
   •  Rapid turnaround on analytical services
   •  Field/screening analyses
   •  PRP-lead removal actions
   •  Goal of characterizing site (e.g., defining extent of contamination)
   •  Focus on NCP  removal action criteria
determine  whether  to  undertake  a  time-critical
removal action, the PA should be completed before
developing the integrated sampling plan.  Otherwise,
the remedial site assessment sampling needs may not
be appropriately factored into the sampling plan. By
collecting enough data to develop a preliminary HRS
score, the Region can determine whether the site may
be eligible for the NPL and whether it is worthwhile
to collect HRS-related samples.  The PA report can
be  combined  with  an  SI report at  a later time,  if
appropriate.

An integrated sampling approach implies the need for
a  coherent approach  to sample analysis.    Some
general principles should be followed to avoid  major
problems. Analytical data must be suitable for NPL
purposes.   Analytical  services  should include  the
appropriate reporting requirements to allow for data
validation at a later date, if necessary.  Table 5 lists
some data quality considerations for analytical data
used to support an HRS score.

The focus of  this fact sheet is on  the technical
integration of assessments at sites where there is a
potential for no action, early actions, or long-term
actions.  In some cases, the Region will rule out the
need for one of those, and the  assessment  process
under SACM will be similar to a traditional removal
or remedial  site assessment.

Integration of assessments under SACM will reduce
duplication of effort at sites by addressing them with
a single assessment approach which incorporates the
objectives of both programs  as applicable  to  each
site.   Integration of  assessments  is  an  efficieni
blending  of similar  procedures  which  may  be
appropriate at some sites and meets the objectives and
needs of both programs.

-------
            Table  5:  Analytical Data Quality Needs  For  MRS  Observed Releases
      Sampling procedures, location, and conditions documented in field log.
      Chain of custody.
      Field blanks for each parameter for each day of sampling. The concentration of contaminants detected must be at
      least one order of magnitude below corresponding sample results.
      Initial 2-point calibration. Low level standard at or below concentration level of concern.  High concentration
      standard no more than 2 orders of magnitude above the low  concentration standard.
      Continuing calibration using low level concentration standard after 10 to  15 sample analyses, or at the end of the
      day/sampling event, whichever occurs first.  (This step ensures consistent instrument response.)
      Blanks run after high level samples to avoid cross contamination.
 Specific examples of acceptable field methods:
    •  X-ray fluorescence (XRF) for metals with site-specific standard matrix or with 10 percent lab confirmation by
      accepted EPA atomic absorption (AA) method.
    •  Field headspace or vadose zone VOC analysis with site specific standards, coupled with previous site information
      such as spill composition, 10 percent split for verification by an accepted EPA method, or successful field
      analysis of a PE or reference sample.
                                  Additional copies can be obtained from:
             Public                                                 EPA Employees
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)          or            Superfiind Documents Center
U.S. Department of Commerce                                       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
5285 Port Royal Road                                               401 M Street, SW (OS-245)
Springfield, VA  22161                                              Washington,  DC  20460
(703) 487-4650                                                     (202) 260-9760 or (202) 260-2596 (FAX)
Order #:  PB93-963341
United States
Environmental Protection Agency
5204G
Washington, DC 20460

$300 Penalty for Private Use

-------
                        United States
                        Environmental Protection
                        Agency
                             Office of
                             Solid Waste and
                             Emergency Response
    &EPA
Directive 9285.7-14FS
PB94-963311
EPA/540/F-94/028
July 1994
Using   Qualified  Data  to
Document an  Observed  Release
  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
  Hazardous Site Evaluation Division (5204G)
                                               Quick Reference Fact Sheet
Abstract

Data validation checks the accuracy of analytical data, and qualifies results that fall outside performance criteria of
the Contract Laboratory Program (CLP). Results qualified with a "J" are estimated concentrations that may be
biased, but may be used to determine an observed release in Hazard Ranking System (HRS) evaluation.  This fact
sheet explains the conditions for use of "J"-qualified data, and introduces factors which compensate for variability
and enable their use in HRS evaluation.
Why Qualify Data?

Chemical  concentration  data  for  environmental
decision-making  are  generated  using  analytical
methods.  EPA  analytical  chemistry methods are
designed   to  provide   the   definitive   analyte
identification and quantitation needed to establish an
observed release under the Hazard Ranking System
(HRS).  Routine operational variations in sampling
and analysis inevitably introduce a degree of error
into the analytical data.  Data validation checks the
usability of the analytical data for HRS evaluation and
identifies the error (bias) present. The validation
process qualifies the biased data.  Certain types of
qualified data for release and  background samples
may be used to determine an observed  release.
EPA Data Qualifiers

EPA analytical methods (e.g., SW-846 and Contract
Laboratory Program [CLP]) introduce a number of
Quality   Assurance/Quality   Control   (QA/QC)
mechanisms during the course of sample analysis to
measure  qualitative  and quantitative accuracy.3l
-------
guidelines' performance  criteria  are  qualified  to
indicate bias or QC deficiencies. The data validation
report usually explains why the data were qualified
and indicates  the  direction  of  bias when it can be
determined. Most EPA validation guidelines use the
data  qualifiers presented below. u   (Other  data
qualifiers  besides these are in use; always check the
validation report for the exact  list of qualifiers and
their meanings.)

   •  "U" qualifier -- the analyte was  analyzed for,
      but  was not detected  above  the  reported
      sample  quantitation  limit.    For  practical
      purposes, "U" means "not detected"; the result
      is   usable   for   characterizing   background
      concentrations for HRS eval'"»tion.5

   •  "J"  qualifier --  the  analyte was  positively
      identified;   the associated numerical value is
      the approximate concentration of the analyte in
      the sample.  "J"  data are biased, but provide
      definitive analyte identification, and are usually
      reliable. They may be used to determine an
      observed release under  conditions  specified
      later in  this  fact sheet. *

   •  "N"  qualifier --  the  analysis  indicates  the
      presence of an analyte   for which there is
      presumptive evidence to  make  a  "tentative
      identification."  "N" data are not sufficiently
      definitive for HRS evaluation.

   •  "NJ"  qualifier  ~  the analysis indicates  the
      presence  of an  analyte  that  has  been
      "tentatively  identified"  and the  associated
      numerical  value  represents  its  approximate
      concentration.  "NJ" data  are not sufficiently
      definitive for HRS evaluation.

   •  "UJ" qualifier -- the analyte was  not detected
      above the reported sample quantitation Limit.
      However, the reported  quantitation limit is
      approximate and may or may not represent the
      actual  limit of quantitation   necessary  to
      accurately and precisely measure the analyte in
      the sample. "UJ" non-detects are not definite;
      the analyte  may be  present. The  result can be
      used to document  non-detects in background
      samples under certain conditions.

    •  "R" qualifier -- the  sample results arc rejected
      due to  serious  deficiencies  in the  ability to
      analyze  the sample and meet quality control
      criteria.  The presence  or absence  of the
      analyte cannot be verified.  EPA does not use
      "R"  data   because  they   arc   considered
      unreliable.s

Validrted data that are not qualified are unbiased,
and can  be used  at their reported values for HRS
evaluation.
Criteria for Determining an Observed Release with
Chemical  Data

Chemical data demonstrate an observed release when
all of the following are true:

1.  The release of a  hazardous substance is at  least
   partially    attributable   to   the   site   under
   investigation.

2.  The release sample concentration is greater than
   or equal to the appropriate detection limit  (e.g.,
   sample quantitation limit [SQL]).

3.  If background levels are below detection limits,
   the release sample concentration must be greater
   than its detection limit, or, if background levels
   are greater than or equal to detection limits, the
   release sample concentration must be at  least
   three times the background concentration. 7
Direction of Bias in "J"-QuaIified Data

It is important to understand the bias associated with
"J"-qualified  data  when  using  them   for  HRS
evaluation.     "J"  data may  have  high,  low,  or
indeterminate bias.    A low bias means that the
reported   concentration   is   most   likely   an
underestimate  of  the  true  concentration.    For
example,  data may  be biased  low when  sample
holding times for volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
are  exceeded  or  when the  recovery  of  QA/QC
compounds is significantly less than the true amount
originally introduced into the sample.  A high bias
means that the reported concentration is most likely
an  overestimate of the true concentration. A bias is
indeterminate  when it  is  impossible  to ascertain
whether the concentration is an overestimate or an
underestimate.  For example, an indeterminate bias
could  result when matrix effects obscure  QA/QC
compounds.

-------
Qualified Data and Direction of Bias

Qualified  data  may  be  used  when  it  can  be
demonstrated  that the data meet the HRS rule for
determining an observed release despite the bias in
the reported concentrations. This condition depends
on the direction of bias:  low bias data may be used
for release samples, and high bias data may be used
for background samples.  Low  bias release samples
are underestimates of true concentration.   Under-
estimated release concentrations  that still meet the
HRS  criteria  (e.g.,  they  are  still  three times
background  level)  clearly  establish an  observed
release.     High   bias  background  samples   are
overestimates   of  background  level.     If   the
concentration  of  unbiased  release  samples  still
significantly  exceeds an  overestimated  background
level according to HRS criteria, an observed release
is clearly established.  Similarly, an observed release
is  established  when low bias release concentrations
significantly   exceed   high   bias    background
concentrations according to the HRS criteria.

These scenarios show that low bias "J-"qualificd data
may be  used  for release  samples at their reported
concentrations, and that high bias "J-'qualified  data
may be used for background  samples  at  their
reported concentrations.

High bias release samples may not be used at their
reported  concentrations   because  they  are   an
overestimate  of true  concentration;    the  true
concentration  might be less than the HRS criteria for
an observed release. The reported concentration for
low  bias  background concentrations  may  not  be
compared to release samples because it is most likely
an underestimate of background level;  the release
sample  concentration might not significantly exceed
the background concentiation.   However, high bias
release  data and low bias background data may be
used with factors which compensate for the variability
in the dat.a.  The factors will enable these types of
biased data to meet HRS criteria for determining an
observed release.

Factors  for Biased Data:  Tables 1 through 4 (pages
6-13) present  analvte-specific factors to address the
uncertainty  when  determining  an observed release
using high bias release data and low bias background
data. The factors are derived from percent recoveries
of matrix spikes, surrogates, and laboratory control
samples in  the CLP Analytical Results Database
(CARD) from January 1993 to March 1994.
The range of CARD data for each analyte includes 95
percent of all percent recoveries. Discarding outliers
left 95 percent of the  CARD data  available for
calculating factors.  The factors are ratios of percent
recovery values at the 97.5 and 2.5 percentiles.  The
ratios generally show a consistent pattern.

An attempt to "convert" a biased value to its true
concentration  is not  recommended  because  the
CARD  data  do   not  differentiate  and  quantify
individual  sources  of  variation.   The factors  are
                   *                o
applied as "safety factors" to ensure that biased data
can be used to meet HRS criteria for determining an
observed release.   Dividing a high bias value  by a
factor effectively deflates it from the high end of the
range to the low end (low bias • alue). Multiplying a
low bias value by the factor effectively inflates it to a
high bias value. Use of the ratio of percentiles is a
"worst-case" assumption that the data are biased by
the extent  of the range of CARD  data considered.
The factors either inflate the values to the high end of
the range, or deflate the data to the low end, and thus
compensate  for  the   apparent  variability  when
comparing a high bias value to a low bias value (see
Exhibit 1).

Factors have been selected for all analytes in the CLP
Target Compound List (organic analytes) and Target
Analyte  List  (inorganic  analytes).   Some organic
factors were  derived  from  matrix  spike percent
recoveries,  and  some   from  surrogate  percent
recoveries, depending on  availability of data. When
both matrix spike and  surrogate data were available
for   the  same   compound,   the  larger  value
(representing  more extreme high  and low percent
recoveries) was used.   Laborato.y control samples
were used to calculate some of the inorganic factors.
A default  factor of 10 was used for analytes  when
percent recovery data were unavailable.

Application of the  Factors: Exhibit 1 shows how to
apply  the  factors  to "J"  qualified  data.  High bias
background data, low bias release data,  and unbiased
data  may be used  at their reported concentrations.
Multiply low bias  background sample data by  the
analyte-specific factor to  bring them to their new
value. The new background value -ffectively becomes
a high bias value that  may be used to determine an
observed release.   Divide high bias release sample
data  by the analyte-specific factor to bring them to
their  new value.   The new release  sample  value
effectively becomes a low bias result that may be used

-------
Exhibit 1: Use of Factors for "J"-Qualified Data
Type of Sample
Background
Sample
Release
Sample
Type of Bias
No Bias
Low Bias
High Bias
Unknown Bias
No Bias
Low Bias
High Bias
Unknown Bias
Action Required
None: Use concentration without factor
Multiply concentration by factor
None: Use concentration without factor
Multiply concentration by factor
None: Use concentration without factor
None: Use concentration without factor
Divide concentration by factor
Divide concentration by factor
to determine an observed release.  Note:  Adjusted
release and background values must still meet HRS
criteria (e.g.,  release concentration must be at least
three times background level) to determine an observed
release.
Examples Using Trichloroethene in Soil:

1.  Release sample  data  biased  low,  background
   sample data biased high.
Release sample value:
Background sample value:
30 /xg/kg (J) low bias
10 pig/kg (J) high bias
In this instance, the direction of the bias indicates
that   the  release  sample  concentration  exceeds
background by more than three times, so an observed
release is established (provided all other HRS criteria
are met).  Use of the factors is not needed.

2.  Release sample data unbiased, background sample
   data biased low.
Release sample value:
Background sample value:
30 /xg/kg  no bias
10 jig/kg (J) low bias
To use the data to establish an observed  release,
multiply the background sample value by factor given
for trichloroethene (1.8). No factor is needed for the
release sample.

New background sample value:
(10 /xg/kg) x (1.8) = 18 Mg/kg (J) high bias
The release sample concentration does not exceed the
new background  level by a factor of three, so an
observed release is not established.

3.  Release sample  data  biased  high,  background
   sample data unbiased.

Release sample value:     75 /ig/kg (J) high bias
Background sample value: 15 /ig/kg  no bias

To use the data to establish  an  observed release,
divide the release sample value by the factor for
trichloroethene (1.8).  No factor is  needed for the
background sample.

New release sample value:
(75 /ig/kg) +  (1.8)  =  42 /ig/kg (J) low bias

The  new  release sample concentration does  not
exceed background concentration by a factor of three,
so an observed release is not established.

4.  Release sample  data  biased  high,  background
   sample data biased low.

Release sample value:     100 /*gAg (J) high bias
Background sample value: 10 /ig/kg  (J) low bias

To use the data to establish an  observed  release,
divide the release  sample value  and  multiply the
background sample value by the factor given for
trichloroethene in soil (1.8).

-------
New release sample value:
(100 Mg/kg) + (1.8)  =  56 /ig/kg (J) low bias

New background sample value:
(10 ,ig/kg) x (1.8)  = 18 /ig/kg (J) high bias

The new release sample concentration is three times
the new background concentration, so an observed
release is established, provided all other HRS criteria
are met.

Documentation Requirements for Use of Qualified
Data: When using T-qualified data to determine an
observed release, include the "J"-qualifier commentary
from the data validation report in the HRS package.
This step will ensure that the direction of bias is
documented.

Use of Other Factors:  EPA Regions may substitute
higher factor values other than the ones  in this fact
sheet on  a   case-by-case  basis when  technically
justified. For example, other factors may be applied
to conform with site-specific Data Quality Objectives
(DQOs)  or   with  Regional  Standard  Operating
Procedures (SOPs).10

Detection Limit Restrictions:  Factors may only be
applied to "J" data with concentrations above the CLP
Contract Required Quantitation Limit (CRQL) or
Contract Required Detection Limit  (CRDL).   "J"-
qualified  data  with   concentrations  below  CLP
detection limits cannot be  used to  document an
observed release.
Use of "UJ"-Quallfied Data

A combination of the "U" and "J"  qualifiers indicates
that the reported value may not accurately represent
the concentration necessary to detect the analyte in
the sample.  Under limited conditions, "UJ" data can
be used to represent background when determining
an  observed  release.    These  conditions  include
instances  when   there  is  confidence  that  the
background concentration has not been detected and
the sample measurement that establishes the observed
release  equals  or  exceeds  the SQL  or  other
appropriate detection limit.  This reasoning is based
on the presence of a high bias in the background
sample. Thus, UJ  data can be used only when all of
the following conditions apply:

   •  The "UJ" value  applies to the background
      sample and represents the detection limit,

   •  The "UJ" value is biased high, and

   •  The release  sample concentration exceeds the
      SQL (or  applicable detection limit)  and  is
      unbiased or  biased low.
Summary

Data validation checks the usability of analytical data
and identifies certain errors (bias). "J"-qualified data
identify that analytes are  present, but  the reported
values represent estimated concentrations associated
with bias.   Low bias  release  data and high bias
background data may be used at the reported values.
High bias release data and low bias background data
may not be used  at their reported concentrations
because they do not establish  an observed  release
with certainty.  Application of factors introduced in
this fact sheet compensate for  this  u icertainty, and
enable "J" data to be used to determine an observed
release.

-------
Table 1: Factors for Volatile Organic Analytes
VOLATILE
ORGANIC
ANALYTES
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
1 ,1 ,2,2-TETRACHLOROETHANE
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE
1,1-DICHLOROETHANE
1,1-DICHLOROETHENE
1,2-DICHLOROETHANE
1,2-DICHLOROETHENE (TOTAL)
1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE
2-BUTANONE
2-HEXANONE
4-METHYL-2-PENTANONE
ACETONE
BENZENE
BROMODICHLOROMETHANE
BROMOFORM
BROMOMETHANE
CARBON DISULFIDE
SOIL MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
..
11144
—
11144
2064
11144
11144
—
11144
11144
11144
11144
2060
—
—
11144
11144
Factor
10.0
1.5
10.0
1.4
2.4
1.4
1.4
10.0
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.7
10.0
10.0
1.4
1.4
WATER MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
—
9180
-
9179
1484
9179
9179
-
9179
9180
9180
9179
1482
—
.—
9179
9179
Factor
10.0
1.2
10.0
1.3
2.0
1.3
1.3
10.0
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
10.0
10.0
1.3
1.3

-------
Table 1: Factors for Volatile Organic Analytes (continued)
VOLATILE
ORGANIC
ANALYTES
CARBON TETRACHLORIDE
CHLOROBENZENE
CHLOROETHANE
CHLOROFORM
CHLOROMETHANE
CIS-1 ,3-DICHLOROPROPENE
DIBROMOCHLOROMETHANE
ETHYLBENZENE
METHYLENE CHLORIDE
STYRENE
TETRACHLOROETHENE
TOLUENE
TRANS-1 ,3-DICHLOROPROPENE
TRICHLOROETHENE
VINYL CHLORIDE
XYLENE (TOTAL)
SOIL MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
-
2058
11144
11144
11144
—
—
11144
11144
11144
11144
2029
—
2046
11144
11144
Factor
10.0
1.6
1.4
1.4
1.4
10.0
10.0
1.5
1.4
1.5
1.5
2.0
10.0
1.8
1.4
1.5
WATER MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
-
1480
9179
9179
9179
-
-
9180
9179
9180
9180
1468
-
1452
9179
9180
Factor
10.0
1.4
1.3
1.3
1.3
10.0
10.0
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.2
1.4
10.0
1.5
1.3
1.2

-------
Table 2: Factors for Semivolatile Organic Analytes
SEMIVOLATILE
ORGANIC
ANALYTES
1 ,2.4-TRICHLOROBENZENE
1,2-DICHLOROBENZENE
1.3-DICHLOROBENZENE
1,4-DICHLOROBENZENE
2.2'-OXYBIS(1 -CHLOROPROPANE)
2,4.5-TRICHLOROPHENOL
2,4,6-TRICHLOROPHENOL
2,4-DICHLOROPHENOL
2.4-DIMETHYLPHENOL
2.4-DINITROPHENOL
2,4-DINITROTOLUENE
2,6-DINITROTOLUENE
2-CHLORONAPHTHALENE
2-CHLOROPHENOL
2-METHYLNAPHTHALENE
2-METHYLPHENOL
2-NITROANILINE
2-NITROPHENOL
3.3'-DICHLOROBENZIDINE
3-NITROANILINE
4.6-DINITRO-2-METHYLPHENOL
4-BROMOPHENYL-PHENYL ETHER
4-CHLORO-3-METHVLPHENOL
4-CHLOROANILINE
4-CHLOROPHENYL-PHENYL ETHER
4-METHYLPHENOL
SOIL MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
1978
11899
11899
1980
11899
11889
11889
11896
11896
11889
1979
11889
11889
1930
11896
118H9
11 "89
11896
11898
-
-
-
1927
11896
11899
11899
Factor
3.5
3.8
3.8
3.8
3.8
8.9
8.9
4.0
4.0
8.9
3.4
8.9
8.9
3.2
4.0
3.8
8.9
4.0
4.3
10.0
10.0
10.0
3.6
4.0
8.9
3.8
WATER MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
1375
7951
7951
1-73
7951
7952
7952
7949
7949
7952
1375
7952
7952
1376
7949
79E.
7952
7949
7951
-
-
~
1375
7949
7952
7951
Factor
2.9
4.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
3.6
3.6
2.5
2.5
3.6
2.6
3.6
3.6
2.9
2.5
4.0
3.6
2.5
6.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
3.5
2.5
3.6
4.0

-------
Table 2: Factors for Semivolatile Organic Analytes (continued)
SEMIVOLATILE
ORGANIC
ANALYTES
4-NITROANIUNE
4-NITROPHENOL
ACENAPHTHENE
ACENAPHTHYLENE
ANTHRACENE
BENZO(A)ANTHRACENE
BENZO(A)PYRENE
BENZO(B)FLUORANTHENE
BENZO(G,H,I)PERYLENE
BENZO(K)FLUORANTHENE
BIS(2-CHLOROETHOXY)METHANE
BIS(2-CHLOROETHYL) ETHER
BIS(2-ETHYLHEXYL)PHTHALATE
BUTYLBENZYLPHTHALATE
CARBAZOLE
CHRYSENE
DI-N-BUTYLPHTHALATE
DI-N-OCTYLPHTHALATE
DIBENZ(A,H)ANTHRACENE
DIBENZOFURAN
DIETHYLPHTHALATE
DIMETHYLPHTHALATE
FLUORANTHENE
FLUORENE
HEXACHLOROBENZENE
HEXACHLOROBUTADIENE
HEXACHLOROCYCLOPENTADIENE
SOIL MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
11889
1905
1965
11889
-
11898
-
--
-
-
11896
11899
11898
11898
-
11898
--
--
11889
11889
11889
11889
-
11889
--
11896
11889
Factor
8.9
4.8
3.1
8.9
10.0
4.3
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
4.0
3.8
4.3
4.3
10.0
4.3
10.0
10.0
8.9
8.9
8.9
8.9
10.0
8.9
10.0
4.0
8.9
WATER MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
7952
1368
1361
7952
-
7951
-
-
--
-
7949
7951
7951
7951
-
7951
-
--
7952
7952
7952
7952
--
7952
--
7949
7952
Factor
3.6
4.5
3.0
3.6
10.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
2.5
4.0
6.0
6.0
10.0
6.0
10.0
10.0
3.6 '
3.6
3.6
3.6
10.0
3.6
10.0
2.5
3.6

-------
Table 2: Factors for Semivolatile Organic Analytes (continued)
SEMIVOLATILE
ORGANIC
ANALYTES
HEXACHLOROETHANE
4-NITROPHENOLINDENO(1,2,3-CD)PYRENE
ISOPHORONE
N-NITROSO-DI-N-PROPYLAMINE
N-NITROSODIPHENYLAMINE (1)
NAPHTHALENE
NITROBENZENE
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
PHENANTHRENE
PHENOL
PYRENE
SOIL MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
11899
_
11896
1966
—
11896
11896
1895
—
1924
1901
Factor
3.8
10.0
4.0
3.7
10.0
4.0
4.0
18.8
10.0
3.2
8.3
WATER MATRIX
Number of
CARD
Samples
Reviewed
7951
—
7949
1345
—
7949
7949
1359
-
1368
1369
Factor
4.0
10.0
2.5
3.7
10.0
2.5
2.5
3.7
10.0
3.5
4.9
10

-------
Table 3: Factors for Pesticide/PCB Analytes
PESTICIDE/PCB
ANALYTES
4,4'-DDD
4,4'-DDE
4,4'-DDT
ALDRIN
ALPHA-BHC
ALPHA-CHLORDANE
AROCLOR-1016
AROCLOR-1221
AROCLOR-1232
AROCLOR-1242
AROCLOR-1248
AROCLOR-1254
AROCLOR-1260
BETA-BHC
DELTA-BHC
DIELDRIN
SOIL MATRIX
Number of CARD
Samples Reviewed
—
—
1801
1870
—
-
_
—
—
—
—
—
--
—
-
1886
Factor
10.0
10.0
7.4
7.9
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
6.2
WATER MATRIX
Number of CARD
Samples Reviewed
-
~
1353
1350
-
-
23305
23305
23305
23305
23305
23305
23305
-
-
1350
Factor
10.0
10.0
4.6
4.8
10.0
10.0
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
8.7
10.0
10.0
2.8

-------
Table 3: Factors for Pesticide/PCB Analytes (continued)
PESTICIDE/PCB
ANALYTES
ENDOSULFAN 1
ENDOSULFAN II
ENDOSULFAN SULFATE
ENDRIN
ENDRIN ALDEHYDE
ENDRIN KETONE
GAMMA-BHC (UNDANE)
GAMMA-CHLORDANE
HEPTACHLOR
HEPTACHLOR EPOXIDE
METHOXYCHLOR
TOXAPHENE
SOIL MATRIX
Number of CARD
Samples Reviewed
-
-
-
1866
—
—
1872
—
1877
—
—
-
Factor
10.0
10.0
10.0
8.5
10.0
10.0
4.5
10.0
4.5
10.0
10.0
10.0
WATER MATRIX
Number of CARD
Samples Reviewed
-
-
-
1348
-
-
1350
-
1351
-
-
-
Factor
10.0
10.0
10.0
3.4
10.0
" 10.0
3.1
10.0
3.6
10.0
10.0
10.0
12

-------
Table 4: Factors for Inorganic Analytes
INORGANIC
ANALYTES
1
ALUMINUM
ANTIMONY
ARSENIC
BARIUM
BERYLUUM
CADMIUM
CALCIUM
CHROMIUM
COBALT
COPPER
CYANIDE.
IRON
LEAD
MAGNESIUM
MANGANESE
MERCURY
NICKEL
POTASSIUM
SELENIUM
SILVER
SODIUM
THALLIUM
VANADIUM
ZINC
SOIL MATRIX
Number of CARD
Samples Reviewed
1147
1153
1208
1149
1150
1148
1163
1148
1153
1154
884
1149
1331
1143
1151
1563
1150
-
1190
1152 ..
-•
1197
1152
1154
Factor
1.5
1.8
1.6
3.3
1.2
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.4
1.2
1.3
1.2
1.2
1.7
1.2
10.0
2.3
1.6
10.0
1.7
1.2
1.3
WATER MATRIX
Number of CARD
Samples Reviewed
1686
1688
1701
1686
1686
1685
1685
1686
1685
1683
--
1687
1727
1686
1685
--
1685
-
1695
1684
-
1691
1685
1689
Factor
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.2
1.2
1-1
1.2
1.2
1.2
10.0
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.2
10.0
1.2
10.0
1.3
1.3
10.0
1.2
1.1
1.2
13
If

-------
References

1. U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1994.
   CLP National Functional Guidelines for Inorganic
   Data  Review.  Office   of  Solid  Waste   and
   Emergency Response. Publication 9240.1-05-01.

2. U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1993.
   CLP National Functional Guidelines for Organic
   Data  Review.  Office   of  Solid  Waste   and
   Emergency Response. Publication 9240.1-05.

3. U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1991.
   Contract Laboratory Program Statement of Work for
   Inorganics Analysis. Document No. ILM02.0

4. U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1991.
   Contract Laboratory Program Statement of Work for
   Organics  Analysis.  Office of  Solid Waste  and
   Emergency Response. Document No.  OLM1.8

5. U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1992.
   Hazard Ranking System Guidance Manual. Office
   of  Solid  Waste  and  Emergency  Response.
   Directive 9345.1-07.
6.  U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency,  1991.
   Guidance for Performing Preliminary Assessments
   Under  CERCLA.   Office of Solid  Waste and
   Emergency Response. Publication 9345.0-01A.

7.  U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency,  1992.
   Guidance for Performing Site Inspections under
   CERCLA. Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
   Response.  Directive 9345.1-05.

8.  U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency,  1992.
   Quality  Assurance/Quality  Control  Samples.
   Environmental Response Team Quality Assurance
   Technical Information Bulletin.

9.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 198o. Test
   Methods for Evaluating Solid  Waste (SW-846):
   Physical and Chemical Methods. Office of Solid
   Waste and Emergency Response. Document No.
   SW-846.

10. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1993.
   Data Quality Objectives Process for Superfund.
   Office of Emergency and Remedial Response.
   Directive 9355.9-01.
                                                  14

-------
15

-------
                                      Additional copies can be obtained from:

                                   National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
                                          U.S. Department of Commerce
                                              5285 Port Royal Road
                                              Springfield, VA 22161
                                                 (703) 487-4650
                                                Order #94-963311
United States
Environmental Protection Agency
5204G
Washington, DC 20460

$300 Penalty for Private Use

-------
                    United States
                    Environmental Protection
                    Agency
Office of
Solid Waste and
Emergency Response
Directive 9285.7-19FS
PB94-963313
EPA/540/F-94/030
October 1994
  4*ER&      Establishing   Background   Levels
   Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
   Hazardous Site Evaluation Division (5204G)
                                                   DRAFT
                             Quick Reference Fact Sheet
Abstract

The Hazard Ranking System (HRS) establishes criteria for documenting an observed release and observed contamination.
There must be evidence of a hazardous substance in the medium of concern at a concentration significantly above the
background level, and some portion of the release and the hazardous substance must be attributable to the site. This fact
sheet defines background, describes background level determination, and emphasises the necessity of strategic, efficient
sampling. Background considerations for each HRS pathway are presented.
Introduction

Background level is "the concentration of a hazardous
substance that provides a defensible reference point that
can be used to evaluate whether or not a release from
the site has  occurred.  The background level should
reflect the concentration of the hazardous substance in
the medium of concern for the environmental setting on
or near a site. Background level does not necessarily
represent pre-release conditions, nor conditions in the
absence of influence  from  source(s)  at  the site."  '
Background  levels  do  not  have  to reflect  pristine
conditions; they define concentrations of contaminants
outside the influence of a release.

Background  level determination, usually by chemical
analysis, is necessary to document  an observed release
and to  establish attribution  of contaminants where
multiple sources or  contaminant contributors  exist.
When evaluating a release,  the  background level of a
substance is  compared with the concentration of the
release sample(s).  Background and  release  samples
generally should be collected during the same sampling
event and from the same geologic stratum or medium of
concern.    Time  differences  between  release  and
background samples become critical when analytical
holding times are short (e.g., volatile organic analysis and
hexavalent chromium). Collect release and background
samples within the  shortest  time  period possible,
preferably on the  same day.   Obtaining  suitable
background  samples  can be challenging because  of
varying  media  compositions  and  potentially  false
assumptions regarding data representativeness.  Consult
         the  Guidance for Performing Site Inspections Under
         CERCLA, 1992, OSWER Directive 9345.1-05, for further
         information on establishing background levels.
         Resource Considerations

         Determining a  background level  is  important  for
         evaluating an observed release and attribution. Only a
         few background samples  are usually necessary.   The
         selection of strategic sampling locations is critical to the
         success of the Site Inspection (SI), which is a limited-
         scope biased sampling event. Evaluate the benefits of
         sampling at specific locations and assess the validity of
         available data  to meet  SI objectives and conserve
         resources (see exhibits 1 and 2).
         Background Level Determination Without Sampling

         Establishing background level requires determining the
         concentration level of a hazardous substance; it does not
         always require sampling.   Often, the contaminant of
         concern  is  ubiquitous (e.g., lead),  and sampling is
         required to establish a background level However, some
         man-made  hazardous substances  (e.g.,  chlorinated
         organic  solvents,  pesticides,  short-lived  radioactive
         substances) can be attributed only to a contaminant
         source.  In areas that are isolated or where no other
         sources  can  be identified,  the presence  of  these
         substances in release samples is sufficient documentation
         of contamination; a background sample is not needed.2
         (However, certain low-level chlorinated organic com-
         DELIVERED OCT 1 3  1994

-------
   Exhibit 1:      Direct Observation and Chemical
                 Analysis

   The HRS documents an observed release in one
   of two ways: by direct observation, or by
   chemical analysis.

   Direct Observation: Material containing a
   hazardous substance from the site is observed
   entering or  is known to have been deposited
   directly into or otherwise has come to be located
   in the medium (e.g., an effluent discharge from
   the site to surface water). No background
   sampling is  required if direct observation is
   documented. However, the presence of a
   hazardous substance in the release must be
   documented, preferably by chemical analysis.  A
   demonstrated adverse effect also may be used to
   document an observed release by direct
   observation in the air and surface water
   pathways.

   Chemical Analysis:  There is analytical evidence
   of a hazardous substance in a medium, at a
   concentration significantly above the background
   level, and attributable wholly or in part to the
   site or source.

   Criteria for observed release by chemical
   analysis (Refer to Table 2-3 in the Hazard
   Ranking System, Final Rule,  40 CFR Part 300):

     •  "If the  background concentration is not
       detected (or is less than the detection Emit),
       an observed release is established when the
       sample measurement equals or exceeds the
       sample quantitation limit,"
     •  "If the  background concentration equals or
       exceeds the detection limit, an observed
       release is established when the sample
       measurement is 3 times or more above the
       background concentration."	
-pounds in aqueous samples may be  associated with
drinking water chlorination.)

In some cases, a sample location may serve as its own
background location. 2 For example, a ground water well
or surface water intake may have associated historical
analytical data. A  release can be demonstrated when
historical data from a contaminated well or intake show
that   it  was  previously   uncontaminated  or   less
contaminated.  Detailed historical data  are  useful to
define encroachment of a contaminant plume.  Often,
historical data are available for wells and surface water
intakes at industrial sites or municipal water facilities
which have a regular monitoring program. l
   Exhibit 2:     Reasons for Collecting
                 Background Samples

     • A release cannot be determined by direct
       observation
     • The  source consists of contaminated soil
     • Historical data are unavailable or
       insufficient
     • The  substance of interest is ubiquitous
Some substances,  such as metals in soils, may have
published background levels that can be applied to the
site locally. Consult the following published data sources:

   • Background  sample  results  from other  nearby
    CERCLA site investigations
   • Local surveys by other Federal or State agencies
    (e.g.,  U.S.  Geological  Survey  (USGS), Soil
    Conservation Service (SCS))
   • University studies (e.g., graduate theses)
   • Tables  or databases  with  natural  concentration
    ranges and averages in local or regional soils 2

Note that in many cases published information  may be
inappropriate.  Published  data  may not account for
regional variations or unique site-specific characteristics.2
Background levels may vary  with regional and local
geology (e.g., ore veins, soils with naturally high metals
content).  It is difficult to demonstrate  comparability
using published  data  because  of  the  difficulty  of
duplicating sample method and analysis. To be similar,
published or existing data should be generated under
quality assurance/quality  control  (QA/QC) measures
equivalent to EPA requirements for release samples.
Published data may be useful when selecting background
sampling locations. If published data are used, multiple
sources of information help  to  support a comparison
determination. The use of background level data without
sampling (e.g., published data) may be acceptable for SI
or HRS scoring activities. The analytical package for the
published data should be obtained whenever possible.2
Background Sample Selection Considerations

Collect at least one background sample per pathway or
medium  collected  outside  the area  believed  to  be
influenced by the site. The activities of the investigation
team  should  not  introduce  any   non-attributable
contaminants  to  a release  or  background sample.
Sampling methodology can minimize thin error.
      DELIVERED  OC1

-------
            Smart Sampling Example:
                Advantages of CIS

   For ground water contamination with multiple
   sources or very large areas of contamination,
   computer-based Geographic Information
   Systems (GIS) are often used to store and
   manage large quantities of water quality data,
   as well as hydrogedogic and geographic data
   and Potentially Responsible Party (PRP)
   information.  The advantage of a GIS over a
   standard database management system is the
   ability to relate data spatially.   Sample data in
   the GIS may contain historical background
   concentrations or aid In the selection of
   background sampling locations. In conjunction
   with GIS, use existing data from CERCLA sites.
It is often necessary to collect more than one background
sample.   The  location and  number of  background
samples depend upon:

  • Hazardous  substances present  at  the site  and
    expected concentrations
  • Availability and quality of existing information and
    analytical data
  • Objectives of the investigation
  • Site hypotheses to be tested
  • Media variability
  • Size of the site, number, and type of sources
  • Pathway-specific  considerations  (e.g.,  geologic
    formations, types of surface water bodies)
  • Other potential sources  of contamination in  the
    vicinity of the site 2

The number of background samples collected may also
depend upon the type of investigation performed.  At
times,  a  contaminated background sample can  be
compared with a release sample to demonstrate that the
site under investigation contributes at least  part of the
contamination in the release sample (refer to chapter 4
of the  Guidance for Performing Site Inspections Under
CERCLA, for more information).

In general, the highest background sample concentration
can be used as a background  level.  In a non-industrial
area, average background  concentrations may be used
when sufficient background samples are collected in a
relatively homogeneous  environment and there are no
alternative sources of contamination nearby. Qualified
analytical  data may also be used  for background level
determination  (refer  to   Using   Qualified Data  to
Document an Observed Release, 1994, OSWER Directive
9285.7-14FS, for more information).
In all evaluations, release and background samples must
be similar for comparison. In some situations, collection
of a comparable background sample is not possible (e.g.,
when there  is no surface water sample similar to an
isolated pond,  or when a surface water body originates
from a spring).2  If background sampling is not possible,
substitute'published data, as available.
   Exhibit 3:     Examples of Factors Affecting
                Comparability

     • Filtered versus unfiltered aqueous samples,
       including preservative added before or after
       filtering
     • Depth of the ground water sample (i.e.,
       screened interval).  Note:  Data may not be
       available for household wells
     • Density of contaminants (floater or sinker)
     • Geologic strata, sorptive capacities, and soil
       types
     • Plants that bioaccumulate certain substances
       (consider cover vegetation types and density
       between surface soil sample locations)
     • Factors within a water body
            thermal  or chemical stratification
            sediments versus aqueous samples
            coarse grain sediments in riffle or
            scouring zones versus fine grain
            sediments in depositional zones
            mixing zones
     • Age, species, and gender (tissue samples and
       portions analyzed)
     • Date, time, and weather conditions
     • Sample handling procedures1-3
Factors  which determine  sample  similarity  include
location,  type,  depth,   medium,  sampling  method,
preservation, handling, timing1 and weather conditions
during sampling (see exhibit 3). Variability introduced by
sampling  methods  can  be  much greater than  that
introduced  by the  analytical  laboratory.   Consider
variability  factors  for   each  HRS  pathway  under
investigation.  The following are specific considerations
when  selecting background  samples for each  HRS
pathway.
Ground Water Pathway

A direct observation of a release to ground water can be
documented if it is observed or known that a hazardous
substance has been deposited, or the source lies below
the water table of the aquifer of concern (e.g., injection
well, buried waste). A direct observation of a release to
ground water does not require establishing a background
level, but the presence of a hazardous substance in the
                          f.3

-------
release  should be  documented by  manifest  data or
chemical analysis. u

When establishing  an observed  release by chemical
analysis,  background samples  generally are  needed.
Collect background samples from nearby wells that are
not  expected  to  be  influenced  by  the   source  of
contamination or by other sites. If there are other sites
or potential local sources of ground water contamination,
collect additional background samples, where possible, to
differentiate their contribution from that of the site under
investigation (refer  to the Guidance for Performing Site
Inspections Under CERCLA, for more information).

Similarity of Aquifers

Where possible, aqueous release and background samples
should be collected  during the same sampling event but
must  be  collected from comparable zones in the same
aquifer.    Interconnected  aquifers   should  not  be
considered as one aquifer when comparing samples for
an  observed release.    When collecting background
samples,  it is preferable not to use samples from a well
screened in two or more  aquifers.2

Evaluate aquifer characteristics before selecting wells for
sampling, especially in areas of complex  or  variable
geology.  Be aware  of the existence of mines, faults, or
other aquifer  intrusions  which  may  affect  sample
representativeness.  (Note:  Section  7.1 of the Hazard
Ranking  System  Guidance Manual,  1992,  OSWER
Directive 9345.1-07,  provides  detailed  guidance  on
determining aquifers and aquifer boundaries.)

Note  information on ground water flow direction if it is
known or can be easily determined.  This information
may  also  be  useful  in  selecting  monitoring  well
installation locations for Expanded Site Inspection (ESI)
and   Remedial  Investigation  (RI)  work.    Obtain
information  on flow direction by using piezometers, by
comparing static water levels in existing wells in the same
aquifer, and by using data from published reports. The
well used for background sampling should be out of the
influence of the site.:

Comparability of Wells

Samples  from  any  two  wells   can  be  considered
comparable if both  are collected from the same aquifer
and if the sample preparation is the same (i.e., compare
filtered release samples to filtered  background samples,
and unfiltered release samples to unfiltered background
samples). Ideally, well completion techniques and usage
of background wells should be similar to those  of the
well under investigation.  It is best if sample methodology
is the same for  both release and  background wells.
Sampled wells generally  should be screened at similar
zones within the same aquifer, depending on the site
hydrogeologic setting, because different depths may have
different  contaminant  levels  and  water  chemistry.
Measure depth as elevation relative to a reference (e.g.,
mean sea level) instead of below ground surface for data
consistency. Where possible, duplicate purge parameters
and method, sampling method, and sampling equipment
for all well samples.  Sample release and background
samples on the same day, if possible, but not more than
three days apart.2

In cases where a background well is not available, sample
a spring before it reaches the surface by inserting a pipe
or well point near the location  where ground water
discharges at the  spring.2 Thoroughly document this type
of sampling in a field logbook. Sampling data may be
supplemented with applicable  published data.  Springs
may  be used for  background  sampling of  surficial
aquifers only.

Surface Water Pathway

Direct observation of a release to surface water may be
documented if material containing a hazardous substance
is seen entering surface water; is known to have entered
surface water through direct deposition; or is present in
a source which is in contact with surface water through
flooding. Direct observation of a release to surface water
eliminates  the need  for background sampling, but the
presence of a hazardous substance in the release should
be documented analytically.  No background sample is
required when sampling an effluent discharge from the
site into surface water, because the effluent is considered
a direct observation.

In non-tidal surface water bodies, sample downstream to
upstream. Background sediment samples should be from
a location  comparable to that of the release samples
(e.g., fine sediments  from quiescent zones).2 Sediment
samples are generally preferred over aqueous samples for
evaluation  of the  surface  water  pathway  because
sediments are more  likely to retain contaminants.  In
general, aqueous samples might represent current release
conditions, whereas  sediment  samples might  exhibit
historical release conditions.

Background  tissue  samples from  essentially  sessile,
benthic organisms (e.g., sponges, oysters) can be used in
support of similar (same species) release tissue samples.
Individuals  selected  for  background tissue  sampling
should  be  the  same  gender  and  approximate age,
wherever possible, of those selected for release tissue
sampling.2
           DELIV

-------
Special Considerations for Tidal Water Bodies

Determine the need to collect aqueous and sediment
samples in cases where the surface water body is tidally
influenced. One approach for background sampling is to
collect outside of the zone of tidal influence (this can be
gauged by the level of the highest tide). Beware of tidal
flow picking up additional sources upstream.  Consider
the effect of the tides  on contaminant concentration
(upstream concentrations would be highest during the
rising tide and lowest at falling tide). Consider collecting
release and background samples at the same tidal level.1

Comparability of Water Bodies

Collect release and background samples from the  same
type  of  water  body.   (Use flow  characteristics  to
determine  similar water  bodies.)   For  example,  a
background sample from a small tributary usually is not
comparable to a release sample from a river.  Consider
physical and  chemical properties  of the surface water,
such as lack  of mixing in large,  slow-flow segments of
rivers, physical  transport  mechanisms, and biological
influences.    Where  possible,   collect   release  and
background samples during the same time  period,  since
thermal stratification and salt/freshwater  stratification
vary with the time of year.  Consider the thermoclines of
a pond or lake or measure them in the field  prior to
sampling.1"2

Simple surface water pathway sampling generally consists
of a minimum  of one Probable Point of Entry (PPE)
release sample and one upstream background sample. If
the surface water pathway has multiple PPEs,  multiple
background samples may  be needed. The number of
background samples collected depends on the complexity
of the path of the surface water body. The presence of
multiple  tributaries  upstream with multiple potential
sources requires multiple background samples because of
the potential  contribution of contamination from  other
off-site sources.1-2

For ponds and lakes,  background  samples  may be
collected near the inflow to the water body if it is not
influenced by the source.  A pond near the site may be
selected for background sampling if it exhibits similar
physical characteristics to  the  pond on site.  For  large
ponds and lakes, background samples may be collected
from  the water body itself but as far away as possible
from  the influence  of  the PPE  and other potential
sources.l

Air Pathway

Direct observation of release to the air pathway can be
documented in two ways:  a release containing hazardous
substances is seen entering the atmosphere  directly (e.g.,
visually observing  dust blowing  off a pile  known to
contain  hazardous substances), or an adverse effect is
demonstrated (e.g., a documented health effect  from a
reaction of incompatible substances).  Background levels
need not be established when an observed release by
direct observation is documented.

Weather conditions are  critical for  evaluating  the air
pathway. Throughout the sampling period, determine the
predominant wind direction and speed. Consider lack of
air movement, effects of low temperatures, existence of
flat,  open  terrain, and any   atmospheric instability.
Perform background sampling upwind of site sources,
although cross-wind samples may be acceptable. Always
consider multiple samples for  this pathway and collect
them  from the  same  height  and at the same time.
(Samples from great heights such as  rooftops generally
are not  useful because  they  do not represent  target
conditions; very low heights  are  subject to  potential
interference  from  particulates  introduced  by  field
activities.) Dust, wipe, soil, and soil gas samples are not
acceptable for background sampling in the air pathway,
but these types of samples may be used, along with field
air  monitoring  equipment,   to   select  release  and
background sample locations. Always sample release and
background   concurrently.      A  minimum   12-hour
monitoring period is recommended for sampling the air
pathway,  particularly  during   hot and  dry weather
conditions. u

Wind roses may be used to determine predominant wind
direction, or to document changes hi wind direction; this
is important when selecting sample stations.' The 'rose"
diagrams consist of bars on a compass face indicating the
frequency of each wind direction during the selected time
period, as well as the average high wind speed for the
period.   If wind  roses are  utilized, determine  the
elevation for  which the wind  rose was calculated;  this
elevation should be representative of target exposure.
Weather stations and airports  may provide information
on local wind direction at  ground level and at  various
elevations.

Soil Exposure Pathway

There is no direct observation of contamination in the
soil exposure pathway.  Establishing background levels
for this  pathway can  be  difficult, particularly  if the
hazardous substances attributed to the site are naturally
occurring substances.   Where possible, collect  on-site
background soil samples from surficial soils not likely to
be affected by the source.  Collect off-site background
soil samples from shallow soils which ideally should not
be affected by other  sources and  sites in the area.
However,  if  there    are   alternative   sources   of
contamination in the  area, background levels  should
account for these contributions. When possible,  sample
release and background samples on the same day, or not
more than three days apart.  (See Highlight 9-1 of the
          DELIVERED PCT  1  3  1994

-------
HRS Guidance Manual for information on background
samples  for non-soil sources  in  the  soil exposure
pathway).

Carefully document location, depth, and appearance of
all soil samples. If depths and thicknesses of soil strata
vary with location, ensure that release and background
samples  are from a  similar stratum  and  soil type.
Samples should have similar texture, color,  and grain
size. 2   During an SI, grab samples (as  opposed  to
composite)   are  preferred  for   determining  soil
contamination. Obtain the background sample from an
undisturbed, unfilled  area,  because  fill  may have
contaminants which are not representative of background
conditions.   If a site  is  located on fill,  obtain  the
background samples from a similarly filled area  (where
the fill is not considered one of the areas  of observed
contamination at the site).1

Select more than one background sample and location
for  the  soil   exposure  pathway.    Do  not   collect
background soil samples from a drainage channel which
receives  water  from off site. *  Where possible,  collect
background samples from  a higher elevation than  the
sources to avoid the effect of potential surface drainage.
Avoid background sample locations that are subject to
airborne contamination from the site or other sources. u

Determining Background Levels in Industrial, Mining,
and Radioactive Areas

Industrial areas pose a special challenge to  determining
background levels.  Ambient conditions may  include
elevated concentrations of common -contaminants from
alternative sources not associated with the site. Common
contaminants in background  samples in industrial and
urban areas include:

   • Metals in soils (e.g., lead)
   • Trichloroethene (TCE) and perchloroethene (PCE)
    in urban aquifers
   • Organic substances in harbor sediments 2

In  industrial  areas,  the  investigator  often needs  to
document that a release  sample is above  background
sample variability. Where potential alternative sources
exist and possibly interfere with background or  release
samples,  assess  whether  the  interference   affects
background samples and the site significantly, or whether
bias can be determined.  Because industrial areas  are
affected by increased levels of contaminants and  greater
local variability, additional background samples may be
required to establish surrounding off-site conditions.  Be
sure to  collect  a sufficient number of samples between
the site and all other potential sources of contamination
in order  to attribute the increase to the site.2 In general,
it is inappropriate to average background samples in an
industrial area where more than one type  of industry
existed. This probably will lead to unacceptable levels of
local  variability (see Establishing Areas of  Observed
Contamination, 1994, OSWER Directive 9285.7-18FS, for
more detailed information).

Mining areas, like industrial areas, pose  a challenge to
determining background levels. Often the contaminants
associated  with  the  mine  are  naturally  occurring
elements. Surface water may originate from the mine,
presenting   no  upstream   location  for  background
sampling. Surface water may  pass through the mined
watershed; its nearest upstream location  away from the
influence of the site may be  in  a different geologic
formation,  with different  water  chemistry,  producing
uncertainty about comparability. Mines are often located
in areas with aquifers that  are  highly fractured  or
influenced by mine drainage tunnels. It is  difficult to find
undisturbed  areas in which  to locate ground water wells.
Because  it may be difficult  to determine background
levels in  mining areas, it is preferable to determine an
observed release by direct observation (e.g., evidence of
mining below the water table of the aquifer of concern,
tailings observed  in  surface  water).   Mine tailings
generally have a high concentration of minerals and are
considered waste; collecting background  samples is not
necessary if  tailings are  analyzed  and the mineral
concentrations are shown  to be  elevated well beyond
what might be expected under natural conditions.

When surface water originates in the source or when no
similar upstream location exists, select a water body with
similar physical characteristics (e.g., a similar stream on
the other side of a mined hill) for background sampling.
The similar water body should not be directly affected by
the site.  Release concentrations may be  so significantly
elevated  (this is common with  large-scale mining sites)
that published data  may  provide a  more  reasonable
background    level   for   comparison.    Establishing
background   conditions  at  mining  sites  should  be
addressed on a site-by-site  basis.

To sample sites with radioactive wastes, follow sampling
strategies similar to those for other hazardous substances.
Criteria  to   establish an   observed  release through
chemical analysis for radioactive substances are available
for the following three groups:

   • Radionuclides that occur  naturally, or ubiquitous
    man-made radionuclides
   • Non-ubiquitous man-made radionuclides
   • External  gamma radiation (soil exposure pathway
    only)

Some  portion of the release sample concentration must
be attributable to the site.  For each group, compare
release  concentrations  against   known  background
radionuclide   concentrations   or   against    sample
quantitation limits for a sample  medium. Section 4.9.4 of
the  Guidance for  Performing Site  Inspections  Under

-------
CERCLA  provides details on establishing an observed
release for each group.

Summary

Collect samples to improve  documentation  for factors
that significantly affect HRS evaluation. If demonstrating
a release or  establishing actual contamination is critical
to evaluating a site, do not limit background or QA/QC
samples unduly  because of budgetary considerations
—collecting these samples may prevent having to return
to the site. Thorough documentation of the locations of
the background samples and potential alternative sources
is  necessary  to assess the  adequacy of the background
levels and to evaluate release and attribution. Evaluate
the benefits  of sampling at specific locations and assess
the validity of existing analytical data. Meet SI objectives
while conserving  Superfund resources when  feasible.
Direct observation   of  a release  does  not require
background  sampling if detectable concentrations  of
hazardous substances are documented to be present in
the source.  Background samples may not be necessary
for certain man-made compounds.

To establish background  levels by  chemical  analysis,
thoroughly review on-site and off-site sources and their
locations.  Collect background and release samples from
similar locations and media.  Ground water samples are
similar when they come from the same zone within an
aquifer and undergo similar sample preparation. Collect
background  samples for surface water upstream of the
PPE.   Additional site  reconnaissance and  review are
often  needed to  select  sampling locations in industrial
and mining areas and at complex sites.
References

1.   U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1992.
    Hazard Ranking System Guidance Manual. Office of
    Solid Waste and Emergency Response.  Directive
    9345.1-07.

2.   U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1992.
    Guidance for Performing Site  Inspections Under
    CERCLA.  Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
    Response.  Directive 9345.1-05.

3.   U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency,  Hazard
    Ranking System, Final Rule. 40 CFR Part 300.
        DELIVERED OCT 1  3 1994

-------
                        Additional copies can be obtained from:

                      National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
                              Department of Commerce
                                5285 Port Royal Road •
                                Springfield, VA 22161
                                    (703) 487-4650
                                 Order # 94-963313
United States
Environmental Protection Agency
5204G
Washington, DC 20460

$300 Penalty for Private Use

-------
                       United States
                       Environmental Protection
                       Agency
                                                Office of
                                                Solid Waste and
                                                Emergency Response
Directive 9285.7-20FS
PB94-963314
EPA/540/F-94/031
October 1994
    K>EPA       Establishing  an  Observed  Release
  Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
  Hazardous Site Evaluation Division (5204G)
                                               DRAFT
                                                                       Quick Reference Fact Sheet
Abstract

The Hazard Ranking System (HRS) establishes criteria for documenting an observed release and observed contamination.
This fact sheet describes an observed release and the data required to substantiate it for National Priorities List (NPL)
rule-making purposes.  This fact sheet further describes the process documenting an observed release and emphasizes
strategic, efficient sampling.
Introduction

'•nrce categories of sampling generally are performed
« uring a Site Inspection (SI):

  • Source sampling to  establish  the  presence  of
    hazardous substances at a site
  • Sampling in the media of concern to establish an
    observed   release,  with  background  sampling
    corresponding to the source to establish attribution
  • Quality  Assurance/Quality Control  (QA/QC)
    sampling (e.g., field blanks) to ensure data integrity

This fact  sheet  addresses  the second  category  of
sampling, although each category is dependent upon the
others for site assessment.

Determining an Observed Release

An observed release is evidence that contaminants have
migrated from a site to a pathway or medium.  Ground
water, surface water, and  air constitute the migration
pathways for observed releases.   The Hazard  Ranking
System (HRS) establishes general criteria to document
an  observed release:   there must be evidence of a
hazardous substance in  the medium of  concern at a
concentration significantly above the background level,
and the release and the hazardous substance must be at
least  partially   attributable  to   the   site   under
investigation.1-2-3 In contrast, the soil exposure pathway is
evaluated  for observed  contamination,  where targets
(human   populations,   resources,  and  sensitive
environments)  may  come into direct  contact with
contaminants.    For more  information  on  the  soil
exposure pathway, refer to the  fact  sheet Establishing
DELIVERED
                    OCT  1  3
                                                  Areas  of Observed  Contamination,  1994,  OSWER
                                                  Directive 9285.7-18FS.

                                                  An observed release  can be  determined  either hy
                                                  chemical analysis of samples, or by directly observing t *e
                                                  release of the hazardous substance (to be documented)
                                                  into the medium of concern (see figure 1).

                                                  Documenting an observed release by chemical analysis
                                                  cannot be accomplished without determining background
                                                  level and attribution.  Determine background level by
                                                  sampling or by using other acceptable information such
                                                  as published or existing sample data.  For example, a
                                                  ground water well or surface water intake with historical
                                                  monitoring data may show a change in contaminant levels
                                                  over time.  If the change  is attributable to the site or
                                                  source,  the  data may serve both as background and
                                                  release levels.  Attribution requires documentation that
                                                  the hazardous substance detected in a medium resulted
                                                  from site activities. Background samples or existing data
                                                  should be as similar as possible to the release samples
                                                  for comparison.2 For more information on establishing
                                                  background  levels, refer to the fact sheet Establishing
                                                  Background Levels, 1994, OSWER Directive 9285.7-19FS.

                                                  Documenting an observed release is a prerequisite for
                                                  evaluating actual  contamination at targets.   Actual
                                                  contamination is evidence that targets have contact with
                                                  the hazardous substance(s) resulting from an observed
                                                  release. The level of actual contamination is determined
                                                  by comparing the release sample concentration to health-
                                                  based or ecological benchmark values,  where available.
                                                  Level I contamination is at or above media-specific
                                                  benchmarks;  level n is  a  concentration  less  than
                                                  benchmark  values.    Note  that   the  detection of
                                                  contamination at  targets  is not in  itself sufficient to

-------
                          Figure 1:  Flowchart for Establishing an Observed Release
                         Waa tha material
                            containing
                      a hazardous substance
                     observed entering or aeon
                            existing in
                         tha environmental
                             medium?
                             Is tha concentration of a
                             hazardous substance m
                              tha release sample
                              significantly above
                                 background?
                                                                                            Is the
                                                                                          hazardous
                                                                                          substance
                                                                                        attributable to
                                                                                          the site?*
 the hazardou
 substance
attributable to
  the site?
No observed
  release
 at the site
                                                                                         Is a portion of
                                                                                         the significant
                                                                                           increase
                                                                                         attributable to
                                                                                           the site?
^
YES
r
Observed release
established by
direct observation
               * Not applicable to ground water plume sites with unknown sources

                Figure adapted from reference 2 (p. 56)
                                                            Observed release
                                                             established by
                                                            chemical analysia
establish an observed release or actual contamination.2
Samples can be  strategically  collected to establish an
observed release and to  include  one or more targets
(dual  purpose  sampling).     Analytical  data  with
appropriate  and  adequate  quality  assurance/quality
control (QA/QC)  are needed, since benchmarks are
expressed in concentration units.

Resource Considerations

The SI is  a limited-scope biased sampling event, and
selecting strategic  sampling locations is critical to its
success.  Evaluate  the benefits of sampling at specific
locations.  Use available data when possible to meet SI
objectives and conserve resources (see exhibit 1).
Observed Release by Direct Observation

To establish an observed release by direct observation, a
hazardous substance must be observed or known to have
been released into the medium of concern. Use existing
                                 analytical data or other references, such as manifests, to
                                 document that the  hazardous substance is  present  or
                                 known  to have  been released.2   See  exhibit 2  for
                                 examples of an observed release by direct observation.

                                 For the ground water pathway, an observed release  by
                                 direct observation may be documented with information
                                 that hazardous materials have  come to  be located  or
                                 deposited in the aquifer of concern.2

                                 For the  surface  water pathway, direct  observation to
                                 establish  an observed release can be documented by:

                                    • Documented hazardous substances seen entering the
                                      water body  through migration or known  to have
                                      entered through direct deposition
                                    • Flooding  of a source  area  so  that hazardous
                                      substances come in direct contact with the water
                                    • Documented   adverse   effects  (e.g.,  fish  kill)
                                      associated with the release of a hazardous substance
                                      to surface water.  Note  that inference requires
                                      extensive documentation and verified attribution.2

-------
     Exhibit 1:     Questions to Consider when Determining the Need for Sampling

        1. Is there an imminent or current threat to human health or the environment? Is a removal action
        warranted?  Sample at targets if human or environmental exposure to  contaminants is suspected.  Sample
        for public health concerns, where possible.
        2. Does the pathway critically affect the site Hazard Ranking System (HRS) score (Si  28.50)? If yes, must
        an observed release be documented for that pathway to achieve that site score? If no,  evaluating the
        pathway for potential contamination may be sufficient (particularly for less critical pathways).
        3. What are the constraints of the pathway? Are targets nearby? Each HRS pathway has certain criteria
        for determining and limiting target distance with respect to contaminants. For example, for the soil
        exposure pathway, contamination must be  documented within a zero to 2 foot depth of the surface, and
        contamination must be on the property and within 200 feet of targets. For the surface water pathway,
        the surface water body must be within two overland  miles of the site or source.2 If release samples
        cannot meet the pathway constraints, do not collect samples.
        4. What are the objectives of the SI? Table 4-7 in Guidance for Performing Site Inspections Under
        CERCLA provides guidelines on the number of samples recommended for a focused, expanded, or single
        SI as part of an observed release sampling strategy.1
For  an observed release by  direct  observation  from
flooded contaminated soils to surface water, the presence
of a hazardous substance significantly above background
prior to flooding must be demonstrated.2  Historical data
may be sufficient to document flood levels, the presence
of a hazardous substance,  and its direct contact with
flooded waters.

For  the  air  pathway,  direct  observation  may  be
established by  demonstrating  adverse effects from a
release.2
Observed Release by Chemical Analysis

An observed release can be documented when samples
from the  media  of  concern  exhibit contamination
significantly  above  background  levels,  and  the
contaminants are  attributable  to the source.   Since
concentrations  of  contaminants usually decrease with
distance  from a source,  sampling near to sources will
better establish an observed release and attribution.1  At
minimum, one validated sample and a background level
are required to document  a release, even if earlier or
later sampling fails to show a release. Varying results
could  be   due in part  to  intermittent  releases.2
Background level determination usually is required to
attribute an observed release to the site.

To document an observed release by chemical analysis,
the  following  criteria  must  be  met   (except   for
radionudides, which are discussed  later in this  fact
sheet):

   1.     The release of a hazardous substance must be
          at least partially attributable to a source at the
          site. (Note:  This does not  apply to ground
         water plume  sites with unknown sources.)
                         2.     The release sample  concentration must be
                                greater than  or equal  to the  appropriate
                                detection limit (e.g., sample quantitation limit
                                [SQL]).U

                         3.     If the background level is below its detection
                                limit, the release sample concentration must be
                                greater than  or equal  to the  background
                                detection limit, or,  if the background level is
                                greater than or equal to its detection limit, the
                                release sample concentration must be at least
                                three times the background concentration. 2

                         4.     The detection limits  must be calculated  or
                                determined properly.  The detection limit used
                                for comparison often depends on the source of
                                the analytical  data.  The SQL is the preferred
                                HRS measure, but other limits such as those
                                provided by the Contract Laboratory Program
                                (CLP) may be used.2 Note that  detection limits
                                may be different for release and background
                                samples.

                       Observed release sampling issues vary according to the
                       medium, or pathway.  These issues include temporal and
                       spatial variation, hazardous substances present,  and
                       documentation of location and collection conditions.  The
                       surface water  pathway may  use  aqueous,  effluent,
                       sediment,  and tissue  samples  from sessile,  benthic
                       organisms to document  an observed release. The other
                       pathways  generally  are more  limited  (e.g., aqueous
                       samples for ground water, soil samples for soil exposure,
                       and air samples for  the air pathway).  Establishing an
                       observed release in the  ground  water pathway could be
                       further complicated by uncertainties about ground water
                       flow  direction,  and  the  resultant  uncertainty about
                       background and attribution.
                        OCT  I 3
894

-------
     Exhibit 2:     Examples of an Observed
                  Release by Direct
                  Observation

       • Ground water pathway-Hazardous
         substances placed into an old quarry
         where the water table has been
         reestablished above the level of the
         deposited materials.
       • Surface water pathway—An
         impoundment leachate seep seen
         entering a stream. (Collect  a sample
         from the leachate to document
         hazardous substances.) Also, effluent
         known to contain hazardous substances
         (through manifests) seen entering a
         surface water body.
       • Air pathway-A field logbook entry and
         photodocumentation of a dust cloud
         originating from a tailings pile.  A
         sample of the fine particulate matter
         from the pile showing the presence of
         hazardous substances will verify the
         release.1J
Ground Water Pathway

For the ground water pathway,  certain types of wells,
including monitoring, irrigation, or drinking water wells,
may be used to establish an observed release, although
the same well may  not necessarily serve to document
actual contamination of targets.  For a target population,
actual  contamination should be documented  using  a
drinking water well. To establish an observed release,
sample the well(s) closest to the contamination source,
where possible. Select background well(s)  outside the
influence of a source and in the same aquifer  being
evaluated.      Either   cross-gradient  or  upgradient
background sample-locations are preferred when flow
gradient information is available.  (Ground water flow
gradient is not required for HRS purposes.)  Be cautious
about using wells that are close to the site as background,
because some sources (e.g., landfills and impoundments)
interfere with natural ground water flow. Pumping also
may affect ground water direction and plume movement.
If available,  pumping  rates  of  nearby wells (including
those  sampled)  may  serve as a  useful source  of
information  for addressing  both sample comparability
and contaminant effect.

Consider characteristics of  suspected  contaminants in
water  when  selecting  sample  locations  and depths.
Contaminants in water may not be evenly dispersed. Oils
and organic substances lighter than water (light non-
aqueous phase liquids [LNAPLs]) tend to float on top of
the water table. Contaminants heavier than water (dense

         DELIVERED OCT  1  3  J994
non-aqueous phase liquids [DNAPLs]) sink to the bottom
of the water column. u
     Smart Sampling Example:  Using Springs
     to Gather Ground Water Data

     Experience at several sites indicates that
     springs are an underutilized  source of
     ground water quality data, which are usually
     obtained from monitoring wells.  Springs are
     common, occur in most geological settings,
     and are found at, or near, many hazardous
     waste sites.   They require no installation or
     purging, and may be used to gather rapid
     screening data upon site discovery and/or
     later as part of an established sampling or
     monitoring program. The spring sample
     must be documented as ground water rather
     than surface water.  When properly
     documented, spring sampling successfully
     has identified surficial aquifer contamination
     when well sampling did not.  It also has
     located reaches of streams into which
     contaminated ground water  plumes
     discharge.  Consider using springs as
     surficial aquifer sampling points for
     documenting either a background level or
     an  observed release.
Surface Water Pathway

A minimum  of two samples  (aqueous  or  sediment)
generally is required for documenting a release in the
surface water pathway:  a background sample slightly
upstream  of the Probable Point of Entry. (PPE) for
contaminants from  the site  or source,  and a release
sample at or slightly downstream of the PPE.  Beware of
tidal  flow picking  up  additional  sources  upstream.
Exceptions to the two sample  minimum  are when the
surface water body  originates at the site (no upstream
background exists) or when multiple PPEs exist. In the
first case,  one sample may be sufficient  to document a
release.  In the second case,  it may be advisable to
sample at or downstream of each PPE to establish an
observed release; similar background sample(s) should be
included.'1*

Proper sampling methods  and sample  handling are
critical for documenting an observed release, particularly
for the surface water pathway. Aqueous samples may be
used to document  current releases to a surface water
body.  Collect the downstream sample first, and aqueous
samples before  sediments, to avoid the introduction of
any contaminants not associated with the site or medium.

-------
Minimize aeration of a sample to prevent reducing the
concentration of contaminants such as volatile organic
chemicals.

Consider seasonal and other potential variations such as
irrigation and flooding when sampling  in this pathway.
Deep,  slow-moving surface  water bodies often exhibit
some chemical or thermal stratification. Stratification
also occurs where two streams converge.  The absorption
or dilution of substances is affected by stream movement,
and depositional conditions vary within the riffles or close
to stream edges.2

Sediment samples  may be used to document historical
releases to the water body. Ideally, the characteristics of
the suspected contaminant(s) should be known to select
the best sample medium, location, and sampling method.
Grain  size,  organic content, and structure can affect
adsorbance  of substances to sediments.  For example,
trichloroethylene  (TCE)  adsorbs to certain particles,
which may bias a sample.2  Sediments  are scoured and
deposited in bends of streams and other flowing surface
water bodies.  Sample from  like areas (e.g., inside bend
deposition areas) for comparability.

Distinguish  sediments  from  soils,  especially   when
sampling along the edge  of a water  body.  Note that in
arid or semiarid locations (less than 20 inches mean
annual  precipitation),  "sediments" include areas with
intermittently  flowing  waters  as  well as  contiguous
intermittently flowing ditches.  Contamination in  these
areas should be evaluated in the surface water pathway.3

Tissue  sampling poses  challenges - for comparability
because  of differences between members of the  same
species, differences between species, variations within a
study   population,  species   mobility,  and   tissue
differentiation.   The target sample species should be
examined for type of organism, approximate age, gender,
size of  population, migratory  nature, and seasonal,
feeding,  spawning, • or  other  periodic activities  that
influence concentration  of  substances  within  the
organism.2  Tissue samples can be used to determine an
observed release only under Limited circumstances; they
are more readily used to document actual contamination.
It is prudent to collect tissue samples  in concert with
other sampling activities when documenting an observed
release.

For tissue sampling, document both the rationale for the
tissue  selection,  and  the accuracy of measurement.
Edible  tissues from  sessile,  benthic  organisms are
preferred for  HRS evaluation.  (Non-sessile  benthic
organisms,  finfish,  amphibians, and reptiles generally
should not be used.)
      DELIVERED  OCT  I  3  1994
Air Pathway

It  is important to consider temporal variability in air
sampling   because  large  variations  in  substance
concentration  can occur  over  a  very  short  time.
Emissions characteristics depend upon topography and
changeable   atmospheric   conditions,   including
temperature,  pressure,  wind   speed  and  direction,
precipitation, and atmospheric stability.

Monitoring  wind  direction is  prudent  to  document
migration of  hazardous substances from the  source.
Wind roses, which detail the percentage of predominant
wind  direction, should be  developed for the sampling
period to document shifts in wind direction.2

For the  air pathway, an  air sample may be  used to
document  both   an  observed  release  and   actual
contamination of targets within a certain radius from the
source. (In contrast, the ground water pathway requires
sampling  at the  target;  the  surface water  pathway
requires  sampling at or beyond the target to establish
actual contamination.)

An observed release by chemical analysis is not easy to
establish for the air pathway because of the difficulty of
obtaining comparable and verifiable samples. The HRS
evaluates outdoor ambient air conditions only, indoor air
samples are not evaluated for this pathway.1
Partial Attribution and Multiple Source Sites

Sources of contamination other than those found at the
site  under  investigation are  often present.   Where
attribution is questionable, sampling  should  produce
analytical data demonstrating that the contamination is at
least partially attributable to the site. Contributions from
sites sometimes can be isolated by identifying hazardous
substances unique to the site under investigation. This
may  require special  analytical  services  and  close
evaluation  of data.  Knowledge of the nearby  facilities'
disposal practices and wastes is helpful.'

Attribution may be established through  the use  of
manifests, labels, records, oral or written statements,  or
other information regarding hazardous substances present
at the  site  or at alternative sources.  If these references
confirm the presence of a hazardous substance in release
samples, attribution generally can be established even if
specific  sources  where the substance was deposited
cannot be documented.2

Establishing  background  levels  is  important  when
attributing hazardous  substances  to  varied  sources.
Background and release sample data should be from the
same  medium using  similar sampling  and analytical
methods. Background samples should be collected from

-------
outside  the  influence of contamination from  the  site
under investigation,  but do  not  have to be  free of
contamination.  The data need only support that  the
release  sample concentration is beyond  a reasonable
background level.  Thoroughly review and document the
location of  potential alternative  sources  so that  the
appropriate  background sampling  locations  can  be
selected. Many hazardous substances may be widespread
in the vicinity of the site. Substances may originate from
non-point   sources  such  as  pesticides   and  lead.
Background  levels  for  ubiquitous  substances  should
account for  local variability;  several samples  may be
required to establish this variability.2

Obtain  sufficient   samples  from   the   site   under
investigation and from other known potential sources (or
other adjacent sites) to demonstrate that an increase in
contaminant levels is attributable to the site. Additional
information beyond analytical samples may be required
if the other sites release intermittently.  To attribute
contamination  sufficiently, collect the following data:

  • Concentration gradients (e.g., establish an observed
    release and attribution with samples from multiple
    wells  or a series of samples  between the site  and
    alternative sources)
  • Flow  gradients and other  information  about  the
    media of concern
  • Data that  associate the site with a unique substance
    or unique ratios  of different substances 2

Complex  factors   affecting   attribution   (e.g.,   soil
contamination  in  an  industrial  area)  may  require
conducting an  expanded SI.  In many cases, attribution
concerns may  be  addressed by fully characterizing all
sources  at a site and those of neighboring sites. '

To establish attribution for the ground water pathway,
sample wells located between site sources and alternative
sources. Three wells generally are needed to define flow
direction and to verify  the source versus an alternative
source(s).  For surface water, a release sample may be
collected downstream of or at the confluence.  Sample
background  and  attribution  along each  tributary  if
multiple sources are located upstream.2
Transformation Products

Transformation products are substances found when a
hazardous substance is changed in the environment by
physical, chemical,  or  biological  processes.   Most
transformation products  at hazardous waste sites are the
result of degradation.2

An observed release for transformation products must be
documented by chemical analysis and the transformation
product must be a hazardous substance.2


        DELIVERED OCT 1  3 199-.
Document the presence of a transformation product in a
release sample at levels significantly above background
level  to  attribute the  parent substance(s)  and  the
transformation  product to  the  site.    The  following
references may be useful for  documenting the parent
substance and transformation product relationship:

   • Site-specific studies on the transformation process by
    qualified   research   organizations   (e.g.,   U.S.
    Government agencies, universities)
   • Technical reports  on transformation from EPA's
    Office of Research and Development
   • Databases containing EPA-reviewed information
   • Articles from peer-reviewed journals
   • Textbooks  on  soil,  environmental microbiology,
    biotechnology, and biotreatment processes and their
    effectiveness 2

For determining an observed release, conditions at the
site  must  be  conducive  to,  or  must  not  impede,
transformation,  and at least one source must be able to
release the substance to the pathway.2
      Smart Sampling Example:  Minimizing
      Investigation Derived Wastes (IDW)

      Solvents, equipment, and other materials
      used in site investigation and cleanup may
      themselves end up as hazardous waste.
      Disposal of IDW at an approved facility
      increases site costs and adds to the overall
      waste disposal burden.  Take precautions to
      minimize waste generated on site.  Solvents
      should be recycled rather than incinerated,
      whenever feasible.  In many instances,
      drums may be cleaned and reconditioned
      instead of sent to a landfill. A series of
      treatment steps may reduce the final volume
      of hazardous waste for disposal. Consider
      pollution prevention when  planning response
      actions.
Radionuclide Sites

The criteria for documenting an observed release by
direct observation apply to radionuclides.  Table 7-1 in
the Hazard Ranking System, Final Rule provides the HRS
factor  categories that  are evaluated  differently when
radionuclides are present.3

-------
For  documenting  an  observed release by  chemical
analysis, radionuclide sites are divided into three groups:

  1.      Radionuclides  that   exist  naturally   and
         ubiquitous radionudides.
  2.      Man-made  radionuclides  which  are  not
         ubiquitous.
  3.      External  gamma   radiation   (for  the  soil
         exposure pathway only).

Observed releases from a combination of radionuclides
and  hazardous wastes (mixed  waste)   should  be
documented separately.

Establishing an observed release requires:

  • Identification of the radionuclide of concern and the
    physical and chemical properties of the radionuclide
  • On-site   and   background  activities  for   that
    radionuclide
  • SQL or other detection limit for  the radionuclide

For gamma radiation, measure the exposure rate at one
meter above ground for the soil exposure pathway.

Specific requirements for establishing an observed release
for  each of the three  groups of radionuclides can be
found in Section 7.1 of the Hazard Ranking System, Final
Rule.
Summary

Documenting an observed release for NPL rule-making
purposes requires evidence that the concentration of the
hazardous substance of concern significantly exceeds the
background level.  The hazardous substance must  be
attributable at least in part to the site under investigation
(except for ground water plume  sites  with  unknown
sources).   Establishing an  observed  release requires
thorough documentation.  The sampling design should
attempt to meet multiple HRS data needs with a limited
number of samples.
References

1.  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1992.
Guidance for Performing Site Inspections Under CERCLA.
Office  of  Solid Waste  and  Emergency  Response.
Directive 9345.1-05.

2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. Hazard
Ranking System Guidance Manual. Office of Solid Waste
and Emergency Response. Directive 9345.1-07.
3.  U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency,
Ranking System, Final Rule. 40 CFR Part 300.
Hazard

-------
                               Additional copies can be obtained from:

                            National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
                                    Department of Commerce
                                      5285 Port Royal Road
                                      Springfield, VA 22161
                                         (703) 487-4650
                                       Order # 94-963314
&EBV
  United States
  Environmental Protection Agency
  5204G
  Washington, DC 20460

  $300 Penalty for Private Use
    DELIVERED OCT t 3

-------
                   United States
                   Environmental Protection
                   Agency
Office of
Solid Waste and
Emergency Response
Directive 9285.7-18FS
PB94-963312
EPA/540/F-94/029
October 1994
    &ER&     Establishing  Areas  of Observed
                    Contamination
   Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
   Hazardous Site Evaluation Division (5204G)
         DRAFT
                            Quick Reference Fact Sheet
Abstract

This fact sheet addresses the use of analytical data to establish areas of observed contamination at a hazardous waste site
when evaluating the soil exposure pathway under the Hazard Ranking System (HRS).  The data may also  be used  to
evaluate hazardous waste quantity for some HRS source types. The soil exposure pathway is evaluated only if observed
contamination  is established.  Establishing observed contamination, defining the area of observed contamination, and
identifying areas of differing levels of contamination are critical in evaluating the soil exposure pathway.
Introduction

The Hazard Ranking System (HRS) establishes general
criteria to document an observed release of hazardous
substances  to the migration pathways (ground water,
surface  water,  air)  and  to  document  observed
contamination in the soil exposure pathway. An observed
release is evidence that contaminants have migrated away
from a site to a migration pathway. In contrast, observed
contamination  is   evidence  that   targets  (human
populations, resources, and sensitive environments) have
come into direct contact with the contaminants.  Unlike
the migration pathways, the soil exposure pathway is
evaluated based on current,  rather than historical,  site
conditions.  An exception occurs when a removal action
is performed under EPA oversight during or after a  Site
Inspection  (SI).   In such  a case, the soil exposure
pathway could be evaluated based on conditions prior to
the removal action  (see the fact  sheet The Revised
Hazard Ranking System: Evaluating Sites After Waste
Removals," OSWER 9345.1-03FS, for more information
on removal actions performed during or after an SI).

The HRS criteria for documenting an observed release
and observed contamination are: there must be evidence
of a hazardous substance in the medium of concern  at a
concentration significantly above the  background level
and at or above the appropriate detection limit, and the
         hazardous  substance  must  be  at   least  partially
         attributable to a release from the site under investigation
         (see figure  1). (For more information on  observed
         releases, refer to the fact sheet "Establishing an Observed
         Release," OSWER Directive 9285.7-20FS.)
         Establishing Observed Contamination

         When evaluating the soil  exposure pathway, observed
         contamination must be documented by chemical analysis
         of samples  from contaminated  areas.   The  source
         samples  are compared to a background level.  Most
         samples consist of soil, but leachate, waste, sediment, and
         other  surficial   samples  may  be  collected. '   In
         comparison, an  observed release in  the  migration
         pathways may  be  documented  either  by  direct
         observation or by chemical analysis of release samples
         compared to a background level.

         Three criteria must be  met  in  order to document
         observed contamination by chemical analysis:

           1.      The  source sample  concentration must be
                  greater than  or equal  to  the  appropriate
                  detection limit (e.g., sample quantitation limit
                  [SQL]). The detection limit must be properly
                  determined.

-------
                        Figure 1: Flowchart for Establishing Observed Contamination
                              li the concentration of a
                              hazardous substance in
                                the source sample
                                significantly above
                                  (background?
 YES
                                        NO
No ob:
contam
at the

lerved NO
site
NO
                    * Direct observation ooes not apply to
                          the sol I  exposure pathway

                    Figure aoapted from reference  2 CP   56}
                                                                           Is the hazardous
                                                                              substance
                                                                             attributable to
                                                                               the site?
                                                                            Is a portion o
                                                                            the significant
                                                                              Increase
         If the hazardous substance of concern is not
         detected in the background samples (or  its
         concentration is less than the detection limit),
         the  source sample concentration must  be
         greater than or equal to its detection limit, if
         both   detection limits  are  the  same.    If
         background levels are greater than or equal to
         the   detection  limit,  the  source  sample
         concentration must be at least three times the
         background level.   Note that detection limits
         may be different for source and background
         samples.

         The  hazardous substance  is  present at the
         surface or is covered by no  more than two feet
         of  penetrable material (except for  gamma
         radiation   emitters, which have no depth
         restriction).1
Sampling to Meet the HRS Sampling Objective

In the soil exposure pathway, there is no acceptable
documentation of  observed contamination  based  on
direct observation, and the potential for contamination is
not evaluated. Consider both the types and locations of
targets when selecting sampling locations. Establish  an
area of observed contamination as close to  targets  as
possible.   Evaluate targets under the  HRS resident
population   threat   when   an   area  of   observed
contamination lies on the site property and within 200
feet of a residence, school, day care center, or workplace.
Evaluate sensitive environments  and resources in the
resident population threat only if the area of observed
contamination  lies within site boundaries.   Evaluate
targets beyond 200 feet but within one mile of the area
of  observed  contamination  under  the  HRS  nearby
population threat.4  Collect samples no deeper than two
feet below  the surface.   Document the absence of a
maintained, essentially impenetrable cover material (e.g.,
asphalt,  concrete)  over  any portion  of an  area  of
observed contamination.J Since surficial contamination is
not limited to soil, sampling of other surface media, such
as leachate  or waste,  should be considered.

Attribute  contamination  to  a  site  by   collecting
appropriate background samples outside the influence of
sources. Obtain source samples from locations where  the

-------
Exhibit 1: Background Samples for Areas of Observed Contamination
Source
Contaminated soil
Tanks/Drums filled with contaminated soil
Tanks/Drums containing liquid or solid wastes
Landfill'
Piles'
Surface Impoundment (liquid)*
Surface impoundment (sludges or backfilled)*
Other sources
Background Sample
Soil in vicinity of the site'
Same as for the soil at the site
Background is zero
Soil in vicinity of the site
Soil in vicinity of the site
Aqueous samples from vicinity of the site;
background may be zero
Soil in the vicinity of the site
Review on a site-specific basis
'See sections 5.1 and 5.2 of reference 2 for additional considerations.
'For these source types, the Indicated sample is likely to be the most appropriate background.
Figure adapted from Highlight 9-1 of reference 2 (p. 344)
substances are suspected to have been deposited (e.g.,
contaminated soil along the flood plain of a contaminated
surface water body). 2  Exhibit 1 suggests appropriate
locations for background samples by source type.
Evaluating  Waste  Quantity  by  Defining Areas  of
Observed Contamination

Identify and delineate areas of observed contamination
for the following reasons:

1.  The soil exposure pathway can be evaluated only if
    there are areas of observed contamination.

2.  Target values are assigned based on the distance of
    targets from  the area of observed contamination.

3.  Waste quantity can be calculated based on the area
    of observed contamination.

A site  may  have more  than one  area  of observed
contamination.   Each area of observed contamination
may be  associated with its own targets.  Assign a source
hazardous waste quantity value for each area.  Sum the
source hazardous waste  quantity values assigned to each
area of  observed  contamination to determine the waste
quantity factor value for the soil exposure pathway.2
Some soil areas cannot be included in evaluating an area
of observed contamination. Exclude the following sub-
areas:

   • Areas   covered  by   permanent   or  otherwise
    maintained  and essentially  impenetrable  material
    (e.g., asphalt, concrete)

   • Areas  of higher  ground not influenced by  runoff
    from the site, if contamination results from runoff

   • Areas  where the types of operations at a  facility
    preclude the presence of hazardous substances (e.g.,
    contamination at loading docks but not elsewhere on
    site)

   • Contaminated areas covered by more than two feet
    of fill or other material2

(Refer to specific examples in Highlights 9-3 through 9-6
in the Hazard Ranking System Guidance  Manual, 1992,
OSWER Directive 9345.1-07.)

Areas of observed contamination can be established with
sampling locations and analytical data that meet the HRS
criteria   for    observed    contamination,   including
determination of background level2.  A minimum  of
three contaminated samples is sufficient to establish  an
area of observed contamination for soil.  The area of

-------
observed  contamination includes  the  three sampling
points and the area within them, except excluded sub-
areas.1-2

Points and linear strips of observed contamination may
be evaluated as areas of observed contamination for the
soil  exposure  pathway,  even though an actual  "area"
cannot be delineated. For soils, one contaminated sample
denotes  a  point  of observed  contamination.   Two
contaminated  soil samples  denote  a linear  strip  of
observed contamination. Either a point or a linear strip
can be used to identify other targets and to demonstrate
a hazardous waste quantity value greater than zero. This
method, however, should not be used indiscriminately to
calculate waste quantity.

For  non-soil sources,  such  as  waste piles,  observed
contamination at  a single point generally is  sufficient to
establish the  entire source  as  an  area  of  observed
contamination.
Inferring zn Area of Observed Contamination

For contaminated soil, an area of observed contamination
may be inferred within sampling locations that meet the
observed  contamination  criteria  and  have  proper
documentation. Select sampling locations that will allow
maximum   use   of  inferred   areas   of  observed
contamination.  This strategy may identify more targets
with fewer  samples.   Consider the  following when
inferring an area of observed soil  contamination:
              *
  • Density of sampling points
  • Physiography
  • Topography and drainage patterns
  • Operational history
  • Transport and deposition of  hazardous substances,
    such as wind dispersion
  • Contamination in the downgradient  portion of a
    well-defined migration route
  • Data  derived   from  other  investigations  (e.g.,
    geophysical surveys)
  • Soil staining
  • Stressed vegetation patterns
  • Aerial and ground photography
  • Infrared satellite imagery indicating soil anomalies
  • Use of composite samples (Samples within one grid
    cell may be combined; vertical samples from a single
    point within a  zero  to two foot  depth may be
    combined.    In  general,  do  not  use  non-grid
    horizontal  composite  samples to  infer areas  of
    observed contamination.) u
Consider the modes of contaminant transportation and
deposition   when  inferring   an  area  of  observed
contamination.  Contaminants dispersed by air would be
distributed  differently than those transported  by water;
take this into account  when planning sampling. Do not
infer an area of observed contamination between soils in
the floodplain of a contaminated surface water body and
those contaminated from other modes of transportation
and deposition.

Determining Levels of Actual Contamination

Documentation  of   observed  contamination  is  a
prerequisite for  evaluating  actual  contamination at
targets. Actual contamination is evidence  that targets
have  contact  with  the hazardous substance(s)  from
observed   contamination.     The  level  of   actual
contamination is determined  by  comparing the release
sample concentration to media-specific  benchmark
values, where available.  Level I contamination is at or
above benchmarks; level II is below benchmarks.  Note
that the presence of contamination at targets is  not in
itself sufficient to establish observed contamination or
actual contamination.2 Observed contamination samples
can  be strategically  located  to establish  an area of
contamination and to include  one or more targets (dual
purpose sampling). Analytical data with appropriate and
adequate quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) are
needed since benchmarks are  expressed in concentration
units.    Analytical  data  should  provide  definitive
identification of the hazardous substances.3

Level I actual contamination concentrations  cannot be
inferred between contaminated soil sampling points. The
inferred area of observed  contamination is  evaluated as
Level II, even  if Level I concentrations are found at
sampling points.2
Use
Grid samples may consist of grab samples (from a single
point) or composite samples  (from multiple  points).
Either grab or composite grid samples may be used to
evaluate the  area  of observed  contamination if  the
following conditions apply.

   • Samples are obtained from a depth of two feet or
    less from the source or soil surface, and the source
    is not covered  by impervious material

   • The available analytical data verify analyte identity
    and quantitation with adequate QA/QC (this may

-------
    consist  of  confirming 10  percent of  screening
    analyses by definitive methods)3

   • The verified analytical data meet the HRS definition
    of observed contamination as defined in section 2.3
    of the Hazard Ranking System, Final Rule

Contaminated  grid  cells  are  those  with  identified
hazardous substances that meet HRS criteria for depth,
attribution to the site, and significance above background
level.  The area within these grid cells may be used to
define an area of observed contamination.

Contamination can be inferred at grid cells not sampled
if they lie between contaminated grid cells.   Grid cells
lying within  inferred contaminated cells are themselves
considered inferred contaminated cells. The area within
inferred contaminated grid cells may be included as part
of an area  of observed  contamination.   (Refer  to
Highlight 9-4 in the Hazard Ranking System Guidance
Manual, 1992, OSWER Directive 9345.1-07.)

The   following   guidelines  should  be  used when
considering grid sampling data:

   • Exclude from the area of observed contamination
    uncontaminated grid cells and unsampled grid cells
    that do not lie  between contaminated or inferred
    contaminated ones.

   • Subtract  from  the  defined   area of  observed
    contamination any grid cells or sub-areas which are
    covered with  impervious materials,  or meet other
    criteria  for exclusion.2

   • Use the same methods to define both the excluded
    sub-areas and areas of observed contamination.  All
    samples should be of the same quality, and analyzed
    by similar procedures. Exclude sub-areas from the
    inferred area of observed contamination  on a case-
    by-case basis.

   • Composite  grid samples may establish  Level II
    actual contamination; specific grab samples  are
    required to establish Level I actual contamination.
Determining an Area of Observed Contamination for
Sources Other Than Soil

Sources other than contaminated soil, such as waste piles,
impoundments, and containers, can be evaluated for the
soil exposure pathway. The entire source is considered
an area of observed contamination if a sample collected
from it meets the criteria for observed contamination.2
Determine an area of observed contamination as follows:

  • Impoundment, landfill, and land treatment
    — Use the  surface area of the source i(

  • Pile — Use the surface area of the pile

  • Ruptured tanks, drums, and other containers — Use
    the surface area of the container or the land area
    under  the container  (Note:    Do not  evaluate
    containers  which have not leaked.)
Example Site

EPA conducted an Expanded Site Inspection (ESI) at a
scrap metal yard in an industrial area to assess inorganic
soil contamination.  For a number of years, reclamation
of automotive batteries had taken place at the scrap yard,
which was surrounded by a residential area.  A prior
removal action mitigated severe  soil contamination and
secured the site from public access, but did not generate
enough data to allow HRS evaluation.

The  removal   action   uncovered   extensive   lead
contamination within the property boundaries  of  the
scrap  yard, but had not  evaluated the residential area.
Eleven residences were situated on a tract adjacent to the
site;  six  residences abutted the scrap  yard boundary.
The proximity of the residential area raised the possibility
that inhabitants could be exposed to lead from sources at
the scrap yard.  A study of  the area revealed  that lead
could be deposited  on the residential tract from surface
runoff,  dispersion  of  participates from  wind,  and
vehicular  movement.   EPA  hypothesized that these
modes of soil transport  created an area  of  observed
contamination in the residential tract.

EPA  collected soil samples at  each residence  and at
border   areas  to  demonstrate attribution  of  lead
contamination by area! contiguity.  Background samples
were  collected at nearby areas that were outside the
influence of sources at the scrap yard.  In  an  industrial
area, it is always possible that background concentration
is inflated from various sources.  To account for  this
possibility, seven spatially  divergent sample  locations
were  selected within the background  area  to  ensure
provision of at least one representative background level.
Soils  in  all  sample  locations  were classified so that
release samples could  be compared  to background
samples of similar soil composition. All samples were

-------
         Figure 2:  Lead Concentrations in Residential Soils Related to Various Background Levels
          r\
          O
          0
         (J
         •0
          ID
          UJ
13

12

11

10
                                         A - Level  I  Benchmark:
                                         B - 3X  Lowest  Background
                                         C - 3X  Second  Highest Background
                                         D - 3X  Highest  Background
                   1  2   3  A   5  6   7   8  9   10  11 12  13 14  15 16  17 18  19 20

                                      Residential  Sample  Number
collected  within  six  inches  of  the  ground  surface.
Analytical  results  from  the  area  of suspected lead
contamination revealed lead concentrations ranging from
740 to 12,600 mg/kg (see figure 2). Lead concentrations
from the  background area ranged from 448 to  1,410
mg/kg.  Observed and actual contamination were clearly
established,  since   three  residences   had   lead
concentrations greater than or equal to three times the
highest background level, and the lead was attributable to
the scrap  yard.  Data from local and regional  health
agencies indicated that  the highest background  level,
which is usually the one selected for HRS evaluation, was
inflated. If this were the case, the number of residences
with actual contamination would be  underestimated.
EPA decided  to examine  the background data  more
closely.

According to data from the health agencies, background
levels of lead in area soils ranged from 500 to 1000
mg/kg.   Statistical analysis of the background  levels
showed that the  highest value, 1,410 mg/kg, was  not an
outlier, but did lie well above the upper quartile of the
data distribution.   EPA suspected  that  the  highest
background value  was not a representative level, and
considered using a statistically derived  concentration.
The use of the mean concentration  was immediately
                                             rejected because it  was subject  to inflation from  the
                                             highest value.  In such a skewed data set, the median
                                             would be a more stable estimator of typical background
                                             value. The median background level of 625 mg/kg was
                                             consistent with published data.  It was, however, only an
                                             inference of typical background level, not a real sample
                                             concentration.     The  second  highest   background
                                             concentration,  856 mg/kg, fell within the range of the
                                             published data. EPA chose this value because a single
                                             background   sample  is  a   sufficient,   defensible
                                             determination of background level under the HRS.  Use
                                             of the  lowest  background  concentrations  was  not
                                             considered because it could erroneously indicate observed
                                             contamination  in areas where lead  concentrations  were
                                             below three times the reasonable background level. The
                                             lowest concentration is not defensible in HRS evaluation
                                             when there are higher background values obtained  from
                                             sampling

                                             Samples  from  seven residences had lead concentrations
                                             in excess of three times background level (i.e., 3 x 856
                                             mg/kg = 2,568 mg/kg).  The health-based benchmark
                                             for lead in  soil  is  500  mg/kg.   The  ESI therefore
                                             established an area of observed  contamination beyond
                                             the facility's boundaries and found seven residences with
                                             Level I actual  contamination.

-------
   Smart Sampling Example: Use of Aerial
   Photographs

   The use of aerial photographs during early site
   screening can provide valuable information for
   optimal selection of sampling locations.
   Further, photos can facilitate potentially
   responsible party (PRP) searches and
   enforcement  activities. Recent aerial
   photography may reveal  burial outlines,
   staining, or stressed vegetation.  In one
   Instance, aerial photos of a landfill pinpointed
   locations of buried drums more precisely than
   did borings.  In another instance, aerial photos
   of two adjacent oilfield-related sites revealed
   the possibility of buried waste  pits.
   Subsequent samples from the locations
   confirmed the existence of the waste  pits.
   Whenever possible, use aerial  photographs to
   help delineate site contamination, aid in
   enforcement, and save money by narrowing
   the areas that must be sampled.
Summary

Surfitial soil and other source samples may be used to
establish  observed  contamination for the soil  exposure
pathway.  Observed contamination  can be  documented
only by chemical analysis.  Direct observation and the
potential  for observed contamination are not evaluated
for this pathway. Sample on the property, within 200 feet
of targets, and within two feet of the source surface.
Multiple  samples which  meet  the  HRS  criteria for
observed contamination may be used to delineate an area
of observed contamination  by inferring contamination
between  sampling points.    The scope  of the Site
Inspection generally does not warrant fully delineating
areas that are not subject to observed  contamination.
The  primary objective is to identify targets  that may
come in contact  with hazardous substances at the site.
Whenever possible, select sampling locations which serve
the dual purpose of establishing observed contamination
and identifying targets.
References

1.   U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,   1992.
    Guidance  for  Performing  Site Inspections  Under
    CERCLA.  Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
    Response.  Directive 9345.1-05.

2.   U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,   1992.
    Hazard Ranking System Guidance Manual.  Office of
    Solid Waste and Emergency Response.  Directive
    9345.1-07.

3.   U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1993. Data
    Quality  Objectives  Process for Superfund, Interim
    Final Guidance. Office of Emergency and Remedial
    Response. Directive 9355.9-01.

4.   U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,   1990.
    Hazard  Ranking System, Final Rule. 40 CFR Part
    300.

-------
                                  Additional copies can be obtained from:

                               National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
                                      U.S. Department of Commerce
                                          5285 Port Royal Road
                                          Springfield, VA 22161
                                             (703) 487-4650
                                            Order #94-963312
AEPA
United States
Environmental Protection Agency
5204G
Washington, DC 20460

$300 Penalty for Private Use

-------
APPENDIX B
  Acronym List
     and
   Glossary

-------
                                  ACRONYM LIST

AALAC        ambient aquatic life advisory concentration
AOC          area of observed contamination
AWQC        ambient water quality criteria
BCF           bioconcentration factor
BIA           Bureau of Indian Affairs
BLM          Bureau of Land Management
BPF           bioaccumulation  potential factor
BPFV         bioaccumulation  potential factor value
BTAG         Biological Technical Assistance Group
CA           cooperative agreement
CERCLA       Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act
CERCLIS      Comprehensive  Environmental Response,  Compensation  and Liability Information
              System
CERI          Center for Environmental Research Information
CFR           Code of Federal Regulations
CLP           Contract Laboratory Program
CRDL         contract-required detection limit
CRQL         contract-required quantitation limit
ODD          dichloro-diphenyl-dichloro-ethane
DDE          dichloro-diphenyl-ethane
DDT          dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane
DL           detection limit
DNAPL        dense nonaqueous phase liquid
DOE          U.S. Department of Energy
DOT          U.S. Department of Transportation
EECA         engineering evaluation/cost analysis
EIS           environmental impact statement
EP           extraction procedure
EPA          U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
ERCS         Emergency Response Cleanup Services
ERD          Emergency Response Division
ERT          Environmental Response Team
FDAAL        Food and Drug Administration advisory level
FRDS         Federal Data Reporting System
FWRS         Fish and Wildlife Reference Service
CIS           Geographic Information System
GW           ground water
HFC          human food chain
MRS          Hazard Ranking System
HRSGM       Hazard Ranking System Guidance Manual
HWQ         hazardous waste quantity
IAG           interagency agreement
IDL           instrument detection limit
LNAPL        light nonaqueous phase liquid
LR           likelihood of release
MCL          maximum contaminant level
MCLG         maximum contaminant level goal
MDL          method detection limit
MMS         Minerals Management Service
NAAQS       National  Ambient Air Quality Standards
NAWDEX     National  Water Data Exchange
NCP          National  Contingency Plan
                                                                                   Acronym List
                                                                                         page 1

-------
       NESHAP      National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants
       NMFS         National Marine Fisheries Service
       NOAA         National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
       NPDES        National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
       NPL          National Priorities List
       NPS          National Park Service
       NRC          Nuclear Regulatory Commission
       NRT          National Response Team
       NSFF         National Sport Fishing Federation
       NWI          National Wetlands Inventory
       OSC          Onscene Coordinator
       OSM          Office of Surface Mining
       OSWER       Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response
       OVA          organic vapor analyzer
       OWRS         Office of Water Regulations and Standards
       PA            preliminary assessment
       PCB          polychlorinated biphenyl
       PPE          probable point of entry
       PRP          potentially responsible party
       QA            quality assurance
       QC            quality control
       RA            removal action
       REAC         Regional Engineering Analytical Contract
       RCRA         Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
       RDT          Regional Decision Team
       RI/FS         remedial investigation/feasibility study
       RREL         Risk Reduction  Engineering  Laboratory
       RRT          Regional Response Team
       SACM         Superfund Accelerated  Cleanup Model
       SARA         Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act
       SAV          submerged aquatic vegetation
       SC            screening concentration
       SCDM         Superfund Chemical Data Matrix
       SCS          Soil Conservation Service
       SDWA         Safe Drinking Water Act
       SF            slope factor
       SI            site inspection
       SQL          sample quantitation limit
       SW           surface water
       SWDA         Solid Waste Disposal Act
       TAT          Technical Assistance Team
       TCLP         Toxic Characteristic Leaching  Procedure
       TDL          target distance  limit
       TSCA         Toxic Substances Control Act
       TSDF         treatment, storage, or disposal facility
       USC          U.S. Code
       USDA         U.S. Department of Agriculture
       USFS         U.S. Forest Service
       USFWS       U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service
       USGS         U.S. Geological Survey
       UV            ultraviolet
       WC           waste characteristics
       WPA          wellhead protection area
Acronym List
page 2

-------
                                       GLOSSARY
Apportioned population:  In the evaluation of drinking water target populations associated with a
blended system, that portion of the population evaluated as being served by an individual well or
intake within the system.

Aquifer:  A saturated subsurface zone from which drinking water is drawn.

Blended system:  A drinking water supply system which can or does combine (e.g., via connecting
valves) water from more than one  well or surface water intake, or from a combination of wells and
intakes.

CERCLA:  Comprehensive Environmental  Response, Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980.

CERCLA Information System:  CERCLIS, EPA's computerized inventory and tracking system for
potential hazardous waste sites.

CERCLIS: CERCLA Information System.

Coastal tidal waters:  Surface water body type that includes embayments, harbors, sounds,
estuaries, back bays, etc. Such water bodies are in the interval seaward from the mouths of rivers
and landward from the 12-mile baseline marking  the transition to the ocean water body type.

Comprehensive Environmental Response. Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980: Legislation that
established the Federal Superfund  for response to uncontrolled releases of hazardous substances to
the environment.

Contaminated  soil: Soil onto which available evidence indicates that a hazardous substance was
spilled, spread, disposed, or deposited.

Depth to aquifer:  The vertical distance between  the deepest point at which hazardous substances
are suspected  and the top of the shallowest aquifer that supplies drinking water.

Distance to surface water: The shortest  distance that runoff would follow from  a source to surface
water.

Drinking water population: The number of residents,  workers, and  students who drink water drawn
from wells or surface water intakes located within target distance  limits.

Drums: Portable containers designed to hold a standard 55-gallon volume of wastes.

Emergency response: See "removal."

Factor:  The basic element of site  assessment requiring data collection and evaluation for scoring
purposes.

Factor category:  A set of related factors. Each  pathway consists of three factor categories --
likelihood of release or exposure, targets,  and waste characteristics.

Federal Register:  Daily  publication of the  Government Printing Office;  contains public notices,
rules, and regulations issued by the Federal Government. Cited as  "  FR ."
                                                                                         Glossary
                                                                                           page 1

-------
      FEMA: Federal Emergency Management Agency.

      Fishery:  An area of a surface water body from which food chain organisms are taken or could be
      taken for human consumption on a subsistence, sporting, or commercial basis.  Food chain
      organisms include fish, shellfish, crustaceans, amphibians, and amphibious reptiles.

      FR:  Federal Register.

      GEMS: Geographical Exposure  Modeling System.

      Geographical Exposure Modeling System:  Population database maintained by EPA's Office of Toxic
      Substances; provides residential populations in specified distance rings around a point location.

      Hazard Ranking System:  EPA's principal mechanism for placing sites on the  NPL.

      Hazardous constituent:  Hazardous substance.

      Hazardous substance:  Material  defined as a hazardous substance,  pollutant,  or contaminant in
      CERCLA  Sections 101(14) and  101(33).

      Hazardous waste:  Any material suspected to contain a hazardous  substance, pollutant, or
      contaminant that is or was in a  source.

      HRS: Hazard Ranking System.

      Karst:  A kind of terrain with characteristics of relief and drainage arising from a high degree of
      rock solubility.  The majority of  karst conditions occur in limestone areas, but karst may also occur
      in areas of dolomite, gypsum, or sajt deposits.  Features associated with karst terrain may include
      irregular topography, abrupt ridges, sinkholes, caverns, abundant springs, disappearing streams,
      and a general lack  of a well-developed surface drainage system of  tributaries and streams.

      Lake: A  type of surface water body which includes:

           • Natural and artificially-made lakes or ponds that lie along rivers or streams (but excluding
             the Great Lakes).

           • Isolated but perennial  lakes, ponds, and wetlands.

           • Static  water channels or oxbow lakes contiguous to streams or rivers.

           • Streams or small rivers,  without diking, that merge into surrounding perennially-inundated
             wetlands.

           • Wetlands contiguous to water bodies defined as lakes are considered to be part of the lake.

      Landfill:  An engineered (by excavation or construction) or natural  hole in the ground into which
      wastes have been  disposed by  backfilling, or by contemporaneous soil deposition  with waste
      disposal, covering  wastes from  view.

      Land treatment: Landfarming or other land treatment method of waste management in which liquid
      wastes or sludges  are spread over land and tilled, or liquids are injected at shallow depths into
      soils.
Glossary
page 2

-------
National Contingency Plan:  Regulation that establishes roles, responsibilities, and authorities for
responding to hazardous substance releases. The NCR established the HRS as the principal
mechanism for placing sites on the NPL.

National Priorities List:  Under the  Superfund program, the list of releases and potential releases of
hazardous substances, pollutants,  and contaminants that appear to pose the greatest threat to
public health, welfare, and the environment.

NCR:  National Oil and Hazardous  Substances Pollution Contingency Plan, commonly known as the
National Contingency Plan.

NFRAP: No further remedial action planned;  site disposition decision that further response under
the Federal Superfund is not necessary.

No suspected release: A professional judgement conclusion based on site and pathway conditions
indicating  that a  hazardous substance is not likely to have been released to  the environment.  (No
suspected release is the PA term analogous to the HRS "potential to  release.")

NPL:  National Priorities List.

Ocean:  A type of surface water body which includes:

    •  Ocean areas seaward from a baseline distance of 1 2 miles from shore.
    •  The Great Lakes, along with wetlands contiguous to them.

PA: Preliminary  assessment.

PA-Score:  EPA's computer program that automates PA site scoring.

Pathway:  The environmental medium through which a hazardous substance may threaten targets.
The PA evaluates the migration  and threat potential through the ground water, surface water, air,
and soil exposure pathways.

Pile: Any non-containerized  accumulation above the ground surface  of solid, non-flowing wastes;
includes open dumps. Some types of piles are:  Chemical Waste Pile --  consists primarily of
discarded  chemical products, by-products, radioactive wastes, or used or unused feedstocks; Scrap
Metal or Junk Pile -  consists primarily of scrap metal or discarded durable  goods such as
appliances, automobiles, auto parts, or batteries,  composed of materials suspected to contain or
have contained a hazardous  substance; Tailings Pile --  consists primarily of any combination of
overburden from a mining operation and tailings from a mineral  mining, beneficiation, or processing
operation; Trash Pile -- consists primarily of paper, garbage, or discarded  non-durable goods which
are suspected to contain or have contained a hazardous substance.

PPE:  Probable point of entry.

Preliminary assessment: Initial stage of site assessment under Superfund; designed to distinguish
between sites that pose little or no threat to human health and  the environment and sites that
require further investigation.

PREscore:  EPA's computer program that  automates site scoring with the Hazard Ranking System.
                                                                                         Glossary
                                                                                          page 3

-------
    Primary target: A target which, based on professional judgement of site and pathway conditions
    and target characteristics, has a relatively high likelihood of exposure to a hazardous substance.
    (Primary target is the PA term analogous to the MRS target expqsed to Level I or Level II actual
    contamination.)

    Probable point of entry: The  point at which runoff from the site most likely  enters surface water.

    RCRA:  Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976.

    Removal:  An action taken to eliminate, control, or otherwise mitigate a threat posed to the public
    health or environment due to  release or threatened release of a hazardous substance.  Removals
    are relatively short-term actions to respond to situations requiring immediate action.
                   s
    Resident:  A person whose place of residence (full- or part-time) is within the target distance limit.

    Resident individual: Under the soil exposure pathway, a resident or student within 200 feet of any
    area of suspected contamination associated with the site.

    Resident population: Under the soil exposure pathway, the number of residents and students
    within 200 feet of any area of suspected contamination associated with the site.

    Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976: Legislation that established cradle-to-grave
    accountability for hazardous wastes, from point of generation to point of ultimate disposal.

    SARA:  Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986.

    Secondary target:  A target which, based on professional judgement of site  and pathway conditions
    and target characteristics, has a relatively low likelihood of exposure to  a hazardous substance.
    (Secondary  target is the PA term analogous to the MRS target exposed to potential contamination.)

    Sensitive environment:  A terrestrial or aquatic resource, fragile natural setting, or other area with
    unique or highly-valued environmental or cultural features.

    SI: Site inspection.

    Site:  The area consisting of the aggregation of sources, the areas between  sources, and areas that
    may have been contaminated due to migration from sources; site boundaries are independent of
    property boundaries.

    Site inspection:  Second stage of site assessment under Superfund, conducted on sites that receive
    a further action recommendation after the PA; builds on PA information and typically includes
    sampling to  identify hazardous substances,  releases, and contaminated targets; identifies sites that
    pose the greatest threats to human health and the environment.

    Source:  An area where a hazardous substance may have been deposited, stored, disposed, or
    placed.  Also, soil that may have become contaminated as a result of hazardous substance
    migration.  In general, however, the volumes of air, ground water, surface water,  and surface
    water sediments that may have become contaminated through migration are not considered
    sources.

    Stream flow:  The  average  rate of flow of a water body, expressed in cubic  feet per second (cfs).
Glossary
page 4

-------
Stream or river:  A type of surface water body which includes:

     •  Perennially-flowing waters from point of origin to the ocean or to coastal tidal waters,
       whichever comes first, and wetlands contiguous to these flowing waters.

     •  Aboveground portions of disappearing rivers.

     •  Artificially-made ditches only insofar as they perennially flow  into other surface water.

     •  Intermittently-flowing waters and contiguous intermittently-flowing ditches in areas where
       mean annual precipitation is less than 20 inches.

Student: A full- or part-time attendee of a daycare facility or educational institution located within
the target distance limit.

Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986: Legislation which extended the Federal
Superfund program and mandated revisions to the HRS.

Surface impoundment:  A topographic depression, excavation,  or diked area, primarily formed from
earthen materials (lined or unlined) and designed to hold accumulated liquid wastes,  wastes
containing free liquids, or sludges that were not backfilled or otherwise covered during periods of
deposition; depression may be dry if deposited liquid has evaporated, volatilized or leached, or wet
with exposed liquid; structures that may be more specifically described as lagoon pond, aeration
pit, settling  pond, tailings pond; sludge pit,  etc.;  also a surface impoundment that has been covered
with soil after the final deposition of waste materials (i.e., buried or backfilled).

Surface water: A naturally-occurring, perennial water body;  also,  some artificially-made and/or
intermittently-flowing water bodies. See "water body type"  and subsequent definitions for more
detail.

Suspected release:  A professional judgement conclusion based on site and pathway conditions
indicating that a hazardous substance is likely to have been released  to the environment.
(Suspected  release is the PA term analogous to the  HRS "observed release.")

Tanks and non-drum containers:  Any stationary device, designed  to contain accumulated wastes,
constructed primarily of fabricated materials (such as wood,  concrete, steel, or plastic) that provide
structural support; any portable or mobile device in which  waste is stored or otherwise handled.

Target:  A physical or environmental receptor that is within the target distance limit for a particular
pathway. Targets may include wells and surface water intakes supplying drinking water, fisheries,
sensitive environments, and resources.

Target distance limit: The maximum distance over which targets are evaluated. The target
distance limit varies by pathway:  ground water and air pathways  -- a 4-mile radius around the site;
surface water pathway  -15 miles downstream from the  probable point of entry to surface water;
soil exposure pathway - 200 feet (for the resident population threat) and 1 mile (for the nearby
population threat) from  areas of known or suspected contamination.

Target population: The human population associated with the  site and/or its targets. Target
populations  consist of those people  who use target wells or  surface water intakes supplying
drinking water, consume food chain species taken from target  fisheries, or are regularly present on
the site or within target distance limits.
                                                                                          Glossary
                                                                                            page 5

-------
      Terrestrial sensitive environment: A terrestrial resource, fragile natural setting, or other area with
      unique or highly-valued environmental or cultural features.

      USF&WS:  U.S.  Fish and Wildlife Service.

      USGS:  U.S. Geological Survey.

      Water body type:  Classification  of a surface water body.  Water body types include:  streams and
      rivers; lakes; oceans (includes the Great Lakes); and coastal tidal waters.  See the specific
      definition of each water body type for more detail.

      Wetland: A type of sensitive environment characterized as an area that is sufficiently inundated or
      saturated by surface or ground water to support vegetation adapted for life in saturated soil
      conditions.  Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, bogs, and similar areas.

      Worker: Under the soil exposure pathway, a person who is employed on a full- or part-time basis
      on the property on which the site is located.  Under all other pathways, a  person whose place of
      full- or part-time employment is within the target distance limit.
               Guidance for Performing Preliminary Assessments Under CERCLA, USEPA, Sept. 1991
Glossary
page 6

-------
 APPENDIX C
Integrated Assessments

-------
     Appendix C
Integrated Assessments

-------
                       INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                          Lecture Overview:
                        Integrated Assessment
                   Integrated Assessments and SACM
                  Introduction to the Removal Program
                   Integrated Assessments Approach
                                                           OH*1
                       Integrated Assessments
                  filiS
                  Introduction to the Removal Program
                   Integrated Assessments Approach
                                                           OH* 2
Integrated Assessments
page C-2
4/94

-------
                           INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                           "Integrated Assessments'
                Integrating removal and remedial site assessment
                investigation to achieve increased efficiency and shorter
                response times
                One of many programs associated with the implementation of
                the Superfund Accelerated Cleanup Model (SACM)
                                                                      OH* 3
                                 SACM History

                Developed to increase efficiency of the Superfund program by
                streamlining cleanup efforts at all Superfund sites
                Designed to combine immediate action with continuing study as
                necessary


                Should restore public confidence in Superfund process
         Hazard Ranking System Guidance Manual,
         EPA 540-R-92-026, November 1992
                                                                      OH* 4
4/94
Integrated Assessment*
           pageC-3

-------
                         • INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                           Traditional Approaches

               Removal assessments are traditionally based on whether site
               conditions meet National Contigency Plan (NCP) criteria for a
               removal action
               Remedial site assessments are focused on collecting data for
               MRS
               The need to integrate these programs is based on the
               assumption that there is duplication of effort between the
               programs
        EPA Directive 9345.1-16FS (Fact Sheet), Integrating Removal and
        Remedial Site Assessment Investigations, September 1993
                                                                    OH* s
                           Integrated Assessments
                      Integrated Assessments and SACM
                    introduction to the Removal Pr<:>grarn
                      Integrated Assessments Approach
                                                                    OH* 6
Integrated Assessments
pageC-4
4/94

-------
                          INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                        What is the Removal Program?

           Federal response capability for releases or threatened releases of:
              • Hazardous substances that present a threat to public health, welfare,
               or the environment
              • Oil spills into or on navigable waters and shorelines
              • Petroleum releases from underground storage tanks
                                                                   OH»7
                                                                            /
                What are the Removal Program Authorities?

           Statutory
              • Clean Water Act (CWA) as amended by the Oil Pollution Act
               of 1990
              • Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation
               and Liability Act of 1980 (CERCLA)
              • Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA)
              • Oil Pollution Act
           Regulatory
              • NCP
                                                                   OH* 8
4/94                                                         Integrated Assessments
                                                                       pageC-5

-------
                            INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                           Initiating Removal Actions

            Authority to approve a removal Is generally based on estimated cost..
               • Less than 50K - onscene coordinator (OSC)
               • $50K to $2M - regional adminisrator
               • Over $2M - assistant administrator, OSWER

            PRP search
               • NCR requirement
            Action memorandum
               • Criteria for qualifying site
               • Proposed removal action
               • Estimated cost

         Note: Cost criteria are under revision
                                                                        OH* 9
                                                                               J
                          What are Removal Actions?

            Near-term response actions taken to prevent, minimize, or
            mitigate threats to public health, welfare, or the environment
            including, but not limited to:
               • Collection and analysis of samples
               • Provision of alternate water supplies
               • Onsite treatment
               • Source control/stabilization
               • Offsite storage, treatment, destruction, or disposal
               • Temporary relocation of threatened individuals
               • Installation of security fencing/guards
                                                                       OH* 10
Integrated Assessments                                                             4/94
pageC-6

-------
                           INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS •
                      Classification of Removal Actions

           Classic emergency
              • 33 percent of removal actions since 1985
              • Immediate action required

           Time critical
              • Planning period of less than 6 months
           Nontime critical
              • Planning period of greater than 6 months is available
              • Agency conducts an engineering evaluation/cost analysis
                (EE/CA)

                                                                    OH* 11




How is the Appropriate Response Selected?

Discovery or ^ Removal Site
Notification " Evaluation

^ No release
or threatened
release
^ Nonfederal party
* undertaking proper
response
Removal action
fr (removal action
memo to
document a
threat)
^ Remedial
" action
OH


•12
4/94
Integrated Assessments
           pageC-7

-------
                           INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                            The Removal Evaluation

           Removal preliminary assessments and site Inspections are
           conducted to determine and evaluate:
              • Presence and magnitude of threat to health or environment
              • Source and nature of the release
              • Activities required to mitigate threat
              • Ability of nonfederal party(ies) to undertake response
              • Need for CERCLA-funded removal
                                                                     OH '13
                                Removal Criteria

                Actual or potential human or animal food chain  exposure
                Actual or potential drinking water contamination
                Fire or explosion threat
                Hazardous substance in containers that pose a threat of release
                Highly contaminated soils at the surface — direct contact threat
                Weather conditions that may cause substances to migrate
                Unavailability of other response or enforcement mechanisms
                                                                     OH • 14
JntegnrtecfAssassmonts                                                            4/94
pageC-8

-------
                          INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                     How are Removals Implemented?

           Technical response support
             • Technical Assistance Team (TAT) - Contractor
             • U.S. Coast Guard (USCG)
             • Environmental Response Team (ERT)
           Mitigation/cleanup response
             • Regional Emergency Response Cleanup Services (ERCS) -
               Contractor
             • Site-specific contracts

           Cooperative agreements (CAs) with states
                                                                  OH • 15
                                   ERCS

                             Analytical services
                             Containment and countermeasures
                             Cleanup, mitigation, and disposal
                             Site restoration
                                                                  OH* 16
4/94                                                         Integrated Assessments
                                                                       page C-9

-------
                        INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                 EPA Emergency Notification Procedures
             The National Response Center (NRC; 1-800-424-8802) alerts
             regional EPA or USCG OSC about most spill notifications
                                                             OH-17
                         Integrated Assessments
                    Integrated Assessments and SACM
                   Introduction to the Removal Program
                   Integrated Assessments Approach
                                                             OH* 18
Integrated Assessments
page C-10
4/94

-------
                           INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS •
                     Removal and Remedial Assessments

            Similarities in programs'goals
               • Evaluate potential for human exposure to drinking water, soil,
                and airborne contaminants
               • Evaluate threats to sensitive environments (e.g., wetlands)

            Similarities in activities
               • Telephone and file investigations
               • Site visits or PA recons
               • Sampling visits

         Fact sheet, page 3                                               OH • 19
                     SACM Goals:  Integrated Assessment

                Eliminate duplication of effort
                Expedite the process
                Minimize the number of site visits and other steps in the process
                Collect only the data needed to assess the site appropriately
         Fact sheet, page 3                                               OH • 20
4/94                                                           Integrated Assessments
                                                                         pageC-11

-------
                           INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                       Integrated Assessment Approach

                 Important features
                    • Combined notification/site discovery/screening function
                    • Single site visit for both programs
                    • Phased file searches
                    • Integrated sample planning and inspection
               See Figure 2, Integrated Assessment, Integrating Removal
               and Remedial Site Assessment Investigations Fact Sheet,
                        EPA 540-F-93-038, September 1993
         Fact sheet, page 4
OH* 21
                       Integrated Assessment Approach

            Notification/site discovery/screening
               • "One door" notification process
               • All sites screened for emergency response
               • Determine whether there is enough time for a file search before
                initial site visit

            Classic emergency
               • Respond immediately
               • Little or no time for file search or telephone
                investigation
         Fact sheet, page 3
OH* 22
Integrated Assessments
page C-12
        4/94

-------
                           INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS
                       Integrated Assessment Approach
                 File search
                    •  Includes all elements of a removal assessment file search
                    •  Table 1, File Search and Telephone Investigation, lists
                      elements
                    •  Document all elements for both programs
         Fact sheet, page 3                                              OH • 23
v	y
                       Integrated Assessment Approach
           Initial field investigation/PA reconnaissance:
              • Combines elements from removal field visit and remedial PA
                reconnaissance
              • Documentation procedures for removal assessment may require
                revision to meet remedial assessment needs
              • Would require onsite reconnaissance at all sites
              • Table 2, Data Elements of the Site Visit, lists data needs for both
                programs
         Fact sheet, page 5                                              OH • 24
4/94                                                           Integrated Assessments
                                                                        pageC-13

-------
                         • INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS •
                      Integrated Assessment Approach

           Sample (optional)
              • Should follow current removal assessment approach
              • Should consider MRS data needs

           Review data and decide further action
              • Both programs meet to decide next step(s)
              • May continue removal assessment, PA, or both concurrently
              • May expedite PA to determine whether remedial site assessment
                requirements should be included in sampling plans
        Fact sheet, page 5                                               OH • 26
V
                      Integrated Assessment Approach

           Complete the PA
              • Collect additional information needed to complete PA
              • Calculate preliminary MRS score
              • Prepare PA report
              • Table 3, Data Elements Needed to Complete the PA, should be
                consulted
              • Refer site to regional decision team if score is greater than or
                equal to 28.5
        Fact sheet, page 5                                              OH • 26
Integrated Assessments                                                           4/94
page C-14

-------
                         • INTEGRATED ASSESSMENTS •
                      Integrated Assessment Approach

           Integrated sampling plan
              • Combines screening level SI plans and remaining removal
               sampling activities
              • For sites going to NPL, remedial project manager (RPM) should
               be consulted
              • Could include sampling for long-term objectives

           Si/removal assessment sampling
              • One event
              • Meet needs of both programs
                 See Table 4, Integrating Removal and Remedial Site
              Assessment Investigations Fact Sheet, EPA 540-F-93-038,
              	September 1993	
        Fact sheet, page 6
      OH* 27
                      Integrated Assessment Approach


            Emergency site inspection/remedial investigation
               • Option allowing Rl to start as soon as site appears to qualify for
                NPL
               • NPL listing needs and Rl needs can be incorporated into single
                sampling plan
        Fact sheet, page 6
      OH* 28
4/94
Integrated Assessments
          page C-15

-------
       APPENDIX D
PA Data and Site Characteristics Form

-------
                                    APPENDIX D

                 PA DATA AND SITE CHARACTERISTICS  FORM
This form summarizes PA information and serves three functions:

    •  Records administrative information to update and maintain CERCLIS

    •  Records descriptive site information to update and maintain EPA's database of CERCLIS
       site characteristics

    •  Identifies and provides space to record technical data to evaluate PA sites
                                         D-1

-------
  OMB Approval Number:  2050-0095
  Approved for Use Through:  1/92
VvEPA Potential Hazardous
Waste Site
Preliminary Assessment F
Identification
State: CERCLIS Number:
Orm CERCLIS Discovery Dale:
7. General Site Information
Ntmc: Street Address:
City: Stile:
Latitude: Longitude: Approximate Are. c
On . .. ^cr

Squ

Zip Code: County: Co. Code: Cong.
Dist:
f Site: Status of Site:
D Active D Not Specified
es D Inactive D NA (OW plume, elc.)
are Ft
2. Owner/Operator Information
Owner: Operator:
Street Address: Street Address:
City. City:
State: Zip Code: Telephone: State: Zip C
( )
Type of Ownership: How Initially I<
Q Private D County D Citizen
O Federal Agency D Municipal D PA Pe
Name D Not Specified D Slate/L
D State D Other O RCRA
Q Indian



ode: Telephone:
( )
entitled:
Complaint Q Federal Program
lition O Incidental
ocal Program O Not Specified
/CERCLA Notification D Other

3. Site Evaluator Information
Name of Evaluator: Agency/Organization:
Street Address: City
Name of EPA or Sute Agency Contact: Strce
City: State
Dale Prepared:
Slate:
t Address:
: Telephone:
( )
4. Site Disposition (for EPA use only)
Emergency Ruponse/Renioval CERCLIS Reconunendation: Signi
Assessment Recommendation: Q Higher Priority SI
D Ye» D Lower Priority SI
D No Q NFRAP Nam
Dale: D RCRA
D Other
Date: Posit
turc:
i (typed):
ion:
D-3

-------
                     Potential  Hazardous Waste Site
                     Preliminary Assessment Form - Page 2 of 4
                                                                                                   CERCLIS Number:
5.  General Site Characteristics
 Predominant Land U«ei Within 1 Mile of Site (check ill that apply):
   O Industrial        D Agriculture    D DOI
   D Commercial     O Mining        D Other Federal Facility
   D Residential      D DOD          	
   D Forest/Fields     D DOE
                                   D Other
                                                                Site Setting:
                                                                          D Urban
                                                                          O Suburban
                                                                          D Rural
Years of Operation:
   Beginning Year _

   Ending Year   _

   Q Unknown
Type of Site Operations (check all that apply):

    D Manufacturing (must check subcalegory)
          O Lumber and Wood Products
          O Inorganic Chemicali
          O Plastic and/or Rubber Products
          O Paints,  Varnishes
          Q Industrial Organic Chemicals
          Q Agricultural Chemicals
               (e.g., pesticides, fertilizers)
          O Miscellaneous Chemical Products
               (e.g., adhesive*, explosives, ink)
          D Primary Metals
          Q MeUl Coating, Plating, Engraving
          D MeUl Forging, Stamping
          O Fabricated Structural Metal Products
          O Electronic Equipment
          D Other Manufacturing
    D Mining
          D Metals
          D Coal
          O Oil and Gas
          O Non-metallic Minerals
                                                 D Retail
                                                 Q Recycling
                                                 Q Junk/Salvage Yard
                                                 D Municipal Landfill
                                                 Q Other Landfill
                                                 D DOD
                                                 D DOE
                                                 D DOI
                                                 D Other Federal Facility	
                                                 D RCRA
                                                       D Treatment, Storage, or Disposal
                                                       Q Large Quantity Generator
                                                       O Small Quantity Generator
                                                       O Subtitle D
                                                            Q Municipal
                                                            D Industrial
                                                       D "Converter"
                                                       D "Protective Filer"
                                                       D "Non- or Late Filer"
                                                 D Not Specified
                                                 Q Other
Waste Generated:
    O Onsite
    Q Offsile
    D Onsite and Offsile
Waste Deposition Authorized By:
    D Present Owner
    D Former Owner
    D Present & Former Owner
    O Unauthorized
    Q Unknown
Waste Accessible to the Public:
    D Yes
    D No
Distance to Nearest Dwelling,
School, or Workplace:

                    Feet
6.  Waste Characteristics Information
                                       Source Waste Quantity:
                                         (include units)
Source Type:
(check all that apply)

 D Landfill
 O Surface Impoundment
 D Drums
 D Tanks and Non-Drum Containers
 Q Chemical Waste Pile
 O Scrap MeUl or junk Pile
 O Tailings Pile
 O Trash Pile (open dump)
 D Land Treatment
 O Contaminated Ground Water Plume
     (unidentified source)
 D Contaminated Surface Water/Sediment
     (unidentified source)
 D Contaminated Soil
 D Other	
 D No Sources
              C = Constituent, W = Wastestream, V = Volume, A = Area
                                                                   Tier
                                                                            General Types of Waste (check all that apply)
                                                                              D Metals
                                                                              D Organics
                                                                              D Inorganics
                                                                              O Solvents
                                                                              O Paints/Pigments
      O Pesticides/Herbicides
      O Acids/Bases
      D Oily Waste
      Q Municipal Waste
      D Mining Waste
                                                                              Q Laboratory/Hospital Waste D Explosives
                                                                              D Radioactive Waste         D Other	
                                                                              O Construction/Demolition
                                                                                 Waste
                                                                              Physical State of Waste as Deposited (check all that
                                                                              apply):
                                                                                         O Solid    O Sludge  D Powder
                                                                                         D Liquid  O Gas
                                                              D-4

-------
                    Potential Hazardous Waste Site
                    Preliminary  Assessment Form - Page 3 of 4
                                                                                                  CERCLIS Number:
7.  Ground Water Pathway
\) Ground Witcr Uacd Tor Drinking
Water Within 4 Miles:
          D Yes
          D No

Type of Drinking Water Wells
Within 4 Miles (check all thit
tpply):
          D Municipal
        .  D Private
          O None
Depth to Shallowest Aquifer:

          	Feel

Karat Terrain/Aquifer Present:
          D Yes
          D No
Is There a Suspected Release to Ground
Water:
          D Yes
          D No
Have Primary Target Drinking Water
Wells Been Identified:
          D Yes
          DNo
I/ Yes,  Enter Primary Target Population:

          	People
Nearest Designated Wellhead Protection
Area:
          O Underlies Site
          D >0-4 Miles
          D None Within 4 Miles
List Secondary Target Population Served by Ground Water
Withdrawn From:
           0 - « Mile

          > « - Vi Mile

          > 'A - 1 Mile

          > 1 - 2 Miles

          >2-3 Miles

          > 3 • 4 Miles

          Total Within 4 Miles
5.  Surface  Water Pathway
Type of Surface Water Draining Site and 15 Miles Downstream (check all
that apply):
          Q Stream  D River   D Pond   D Lake
          D Bay    D Ocean  D Other	
                                 Shortest Overland Distance From Any Source to Surface Water:

                                           	Feet

                                                     Miles
Is There a Suspected Release to Surface Water:
          G Yes
          D No
                                 Site is Located in:
                                           D Annual - 10 yr Floodplain
                                           D > 10 yr - 100 yr Floodplain
                                           D > 100 yr - 500 yr Floodplain
                                           D > 500 yr Floodplain
Drinking Water Intakes Located Along the Surface Water Migration Path:
          D Yes
          D No

Have Primary Target Drinking Water Intakes Been Identified:
          O Yes
          D No

If Yes, Enter Population Served by Primary Target Intakes:

                    	People
                                 List All Secondary Target Drinking Water Intakes:
                                 Name     Water Body           Flow (cfs)  Population Served
                                                     Total within 15 Miles
Fisheries Located Along the Surface Water Migration Path:
          D Yea
          D No

Have Primary Target Fisheries Been Identi/ied:
          D Yea
          D No
                                 List All Secondary Target Fisheries:
                                    Water Body/Fishery Name
                                                             D-5

-------
iyCDA Potential Hazardous Waste Site - CERCLIS Number:
^^t-' •» Preliminary Assessment Form - Page 4 of 4
5. Surface Water Pathway (continued)
Wetlands Located Along the Suffice Witer Migration Pith:
D Yes
D No
Hive Primary Target Wetlands Been Identified:
D Yea
D No
Lilt Secondary Target Wetlands:
Wiltr Body Flow (cfs) Frontage Miles




Other Sensitive Environments Located Along the Surface Water Migration Path:
D Yes
D No
Have Primary Target Sensitive Environments Been Identified:
Q Yes
DNo
List Secondary Target Sensitive Environment!:
Witer Body Flow (cfs) Sensitive Environment Type








9. Soil Exposure Pathway
Are People Occupying Residence) or Number of Workers Onsite: Have Terrestrial Sensitive Environments Been Identified on
Attending School or Diycare oo or Within 200 Q None or Within 200 Feet of Areas of Known or Suspected
Feel of Areas of Known or Suspected D 1 - 100 Contamination:
Contamination: D 101 - 1,000 D Yes
D Yes D > 1,000 D No
DNo
If Yes, List Each Terrestrial Sensitive Environment:
If Yes, Enter Total Resident Population:
People


10. Air Pathway
Is There a Suspected Release to Air:
Q Yes
D No
Enter Total Population on or Wilhin:
Oniile
0 - U Mile
> U - « Mile
>  1 • 2 Milu
> 2 • 3 Miles
> 3 -  W - 'A Mile

D-6
           • U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1995-386-541/22018

-------